Download Print this page

Keysight E6680A User & Programmers Manual

Keysight E6680A User & Programmers Manual

Signal analyzer iq analyzer mode

Hide thumbs Also See for E6680A:

User reference (3520 pages)

,

User & programmers manual (3096 pages)

,

User manual (2667 pages)

Table Of Contents

page of 1175

/ 1175
Contents
Table of Contents
Bookmarks

Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual

X-Series Signal Analyzers

IQ Analyzer Mode

E6680A E6680E E6681A

M9410A M9411A M9415A M9416A M9421A

M9410E M9411E M9415E M9416E

M8920A M8920B

N9000B N9010B N9020B N9021B N9030B N9032B N9038B N9040B N9041B

N9042B N9048B

S9100A S9101A S9106A S9108A S9110A

USER'S & PROGRAMMER'S REFERENCE

Table of Contents

Advertisement

Table of Contents

Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the E6680A and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Summary of Contents for Keysight E6680A

Page 1 X-Series Signal Analyzers IQ Analyzer Mode E6680A E6680E E6681A M9410A M9411A M9415A M9416A M9421A M9410E M9411E M9415E M9416E M8920A M8920B N9000B N9010B N9020B N9021B N9030B N9032B N9038B N9040B N9041B N9042B N9048B S9100A S9101A S9106A S9108A S9110A USER'S & PROGRAMMER'S REFERENCE...
Page 2: External
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A to US government customers under its PARTICULAR PURPOSE. KEYSIGHT SHALL Keysight Technologies, Inc. as governed by standard commercial license, which is NOT BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS OR FOR United States and international copyright...
Page 3: Table Of Contents
X-Series Signal Analyzers IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference Table Of Contents IQ Analyzer ModeUser's & Programmer's Reference Table Of Contents 1 Documentation Roadmap 1.1 Products Covered by this Document 1.2 Additional Documentation 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs 2.1.1 Mode/Meas/View Dialog 2.1.1.1 Mode 2.1.1.2 Application Mode Remote Commands Application Mode Catalog Query (Remote Command Only)
Page 4 Table Of Contents 2.3.1 Window Title 2.3.2 Measurement Data 2.3.3 Annotation Hotspot 2.4 Menu Panel 2.4.1 Right-Click Menu 2.4.1.1 Add to User Menu 2.4.1.2 Help on this setting 2.4.1.3 Show SCPI Command 2.4.1.4 Add to SCPI Recorder 2.4.1.5 Start/Stop SCPI Recorder 2.4.1.6 Show SCPI Recorder 2.4.2 User Menu 2.5 Cancel key...
Page 5 Table Of Contents 2.17.8 Use Case: Displaying Marker and Peak Tables 2.17.9 View Editor Remote Commands 2.18 Multiscreen 2.18.1 Select Screen 2.18.2 Screen List (Remote only command) 2.19 Fullscreen 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement 3.1.1 Views 3.1.1.1 Normal 3.1.2 Windows 3.1.3 Amplitude...
Page 6 Table Of Contents High Freq Prefilter 3.1.4 BW 3.1.4.1 Settings Res BW 3.1.5 Display 3.1.5.1 View View User View Restore Layout to Default Save Layout as New View Re-Save User View Rename User View Delete User View Delete All User Views View Editor Remote Commands View Listing Query User View Listing Query...
Page 7 Table Of Contents Minimum Peak Pk-Pk Search Marker Delta Mkr->CF Mkr->Ref Lvl Continuous Peak Search 3.1.7.4 Pk Search Config Pk Threshold Pk Excursion Pk Threshold Line Peak Search Mode Query the Signal Peaks (Remote Query Only) Query Number of Peaks Found (Remote Query Only) 3.1.7.5 Properties Marker Frequency Relative To...
Page 8 Table Of Contents FFT Window Length Ctrl Window Length FFT Length Filter/FFT Setup Summary Table 3.1.8.4 IF Path IF Path Apply EDC Preset 3.1.8.5 Advanced Phase Noise Optimization ADC Dither LO Dither IF Gain IF Gain Offset Other IF Gain Mixing Mode Power Reference Plane Mixing Mode State (Remote Command Only)
Page 9 Table Of Contents 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement 3.2.1 Views 3.2.1.1 RF Envelope 3.2.1.2 I/Q Waveform 3.2.2 Windows 3.2.2.1 RF Envelope 3.2.2.2 Metrics 3.2.2.3 I/Q Waveform 3.2.3 Amplitude 3.2.3.1 Y Scale Ref Value Scale/Div Scale Range Ref Position Auto Scaling 3.2.3.2 Attenuation Full Range Atten Mech Atten Elec Atten...
Page 10 Table Of Contents SW Preselection BW High Freq Prefilter 3.2.4 BW 3.2.4.1 Settings Digital IF BW Filter Type Filter BW Filter Alpha Channel Filter Bandwidth (Backwards Compatibility Remote Command Only) 3.2.5 Display 3.2.5.1 View View User View Restore Layout to Default Save Layout as New View Re-Save User View Rename User View...
Page 11 Table Of Contents Peak Search Next Peak Minimum Peak Marker Delta 3.2.7.4 Pk Search Config Peak Search Range Peak Search Range Start Peak Search Range Stop 3.2.7.5 Marker Function Marker Time Interval Function Interval Span Interval Left Interval Right 3.2.7.6 Properties Marker Time Relative To Marker Trace...
Page 12 Table Of Contents IF Frequency (Remote Command Only) 3.2.8.4 Global Global Center Freq Global EMC Std Restore Defaults 3.2.8.5 Sample Period (Aperture) Setting (Remote Query Only) 3.2.9 Sweep 3.2.9.1 Sweep/Control Restart Pause/Resume Sweep/Measure Abort (Remote Command Only) 3.2.9.2 X Scale Ref Value Scale/Div Ref Position...
Page 13 Table Of Contents Context Packets Summary Packets 3.3.4 All Other Menus 3.4 Fast (Deep) Capture 3.4.1 Fast Capture Length 3.4.2 Fast Capture Word Length 3.4.3 Initiate Fast Capture 3.4.4 Fast Capture Block 3.4.5 Fast Capture Pointer 3.4.6 Fetch Fast Capture 3.4.7 Fast Capture Peak 3.4.8 Fast Capture Complete 4 System...
Page 14 Table Of Contents 4.2.2.4 HiSLIP Server 4.2.2.5 Verbose SCPI On/Off 4.2.2.6 Device Clear on Disconnect 4.2.2.7 SCPI Socket Control Port (Remote Query Only) 4.2.2.8 SCPI Instrument Port (Remote Query Only) 4.2.3 Web Password Reset 4.2.4 System IDN Response 4.2.4.1 System IDN Response 4.2.4.2 User IDN 4.2.4.3 SYSTem:PERSona (Remote Commands Only) SYSTem:PERSona:DEFault...
Page 15 Table Of Contents 4.3.1 Power-On Mode 4.3.2 Table of Modes 4.3.3 Preload: Select All, Preload: Deselect All 4.3.4 Move Up, Move Down 4.3.5 Unload 4.3.6 Loaded Modes (Remote Query Only) 4.3.7 User Interface 4.3.7.1 Menu Panel Position 4.3.7.2 Menu Panel Tabs 4.3.7.3 Annotations Local Settings/All Off 4.3.7.4 Display Theme 4.3.7.5 Backlight...
Page 16 Table Of Contents 4.4.6 Configure Applications - Instrument boot-up 4.4.7 Configure Applications - Remote Commands 4.4.7.1 Configuration list (Remote Command Only) 4.4.7.2 Configuration Memory Available (Remote Query Only) 4.4.7.3 Configuration Memory Total (Remote Query Only) 4.4.7.4 Configuration Memory Used (Remote Query Only) 4.4.7.5 Configuration Application Memory (Remote Query Only) 4.5 Restore Defaults 4.5.1 Input/Output...
Page 17 Table Of Contents 4.6.2.13 Align IF Cable 4.6.2.14 Align RRH Amplitude 4.6.2.15 Align Fast RRH Amplitude 4.6.2.16 Align RRH LO Power 4.6.2.17 Align LO Clock 4.6.2.18 Align VXT Transceiver 4.6.2.19 Align up down converter 4.6.2.20 Align Selected Freq Ranges Enable Extended Freq Range Frequency Range Enable 4.6.2.21 Align External Mixer Path...
Page 18 Table Of Contents Align Now, 20 Hz to 30 MHz Align Now, 30 MHz to 3.6 GHz Align Now, 20 Hz to 3.6 GHz Alert 4.6.6.8 Scheduler Schedule Setup Task Date/Time Hour Minute Recurrence Number of Weeks 4.7 Licensing 4.7.1 License Manager 4.7.2 System Software Version Date 4.7.3 Software Support Expiration Date 4.7.4 Network Licenses...
Page 19 Table Of Contents 4.8.1 USB Write Protect 4.8.2 Restore Security Defaults 4.9 Diagnostics 4.9.1 Show Hardware Statistics 4.9.2 Pathwave Calibration Advisor… 4.9.3 Query the Mechanical Relay Cycle Count (Remote Query Only) 4.9.4 Query the Operating Temperature Extremes (Remote Query Only) 4.9.5 Query the Elapsed Time since 1st power on (Remote Query Only) 4.10 Service 4.11 SCPI Recorder...
Page 20 Table Of Contents 5 Preset 5.1 Preset Dropdown 5.2 Mode Preset 5.3 Restore Mode Defaults 5.4 Input/Output Preset 5.5 Full Mode Preset 5.6 User Preset 5.7 Save User Preset 5.8 User Preset All Modes 5.9 Restore Defaults All Modes 5.10 User Preset All Screens 5.11 Save User Preset All Screens 5.12 Restore Screen Defaults 5.13 Preset Type (Remote Command Only)
Page 21 Table Of Contents 6.1.8 List Sequencer 6.1.8.1 Sequencer 6.1.8.2 Initiate Sequence 6.1.8.3 Repetition 6.1.8.4 Trig Out Type 6.1.8.5 Select Data Marker 6.1.8.6 Manual Trigger Now 6.1.8.7 List Sequencer Setup Number of Steps Go To Step Insert Step Before Delete Step Clear List Step Trigger Transition Time...
Page 22 Table Of Contents 6.1.9.1 Frequency 6.1.9.2 Channel 6.1.9.3 Radio Setup Radio Standard/Radio Band Radio Band Link 6.1.9.4 Set Reference Frequency 6.1.9.5 Freq Reference 6.1.9.6 Freq Offset 6.1.9.7 Freq Increment 6.1.9.8 Rx/Tx Coupling 6.1.9.9 Rx/Tx Offset 6.1.10 Modulation 6.1.11 Modulation Setup 6.1.11.1 AM 6.1.11.2 AM Mod Depth 6.1.11.3 AM Rate...
Page 23 Table Of Contents Single trigger Segment Advance trigger Trigger Source Bus Trigger Command (Remote Command Only) Sync to Trigger Source External Trigger Delay External Trigger Polarity Select PXI Line PXI Trigger Delay PXI Trigger Polarity I/Q Adjustments I/Q Gain I/Q Delay RMS Calculation Mode Calculate Use Header RMS...
Page 24 Table Of Contents Segments in ARB Memory Delete Segment From ARB Mem Delete All From ARB Memory Delete Segment Waveform Utilities Add Waveform Replace Selected Waveform Clear Waveform from Slot Lock Waveform in Slot Slot Status Query (Remote Command Only) Slots Free Query (Remote Query Only) Slots Used Query (Remote Query Only) Slot Waveform Name Query (Remote Command Only)
Page 25 Table Of Contents 6.2.3 SA Frequency Extender Firmware Update (Front Panel Only) 6.2.4 SA Frequency Extender Cable Correction 6.2.5 Half Duplex Input Port 6.2.6 Port Information (Remote Command Only) 6.2.7 RF Preselector 6.2.8 Notch Filter 6.2.9 RF Calibrator 6.2.10 RF Coupling 6.2.11 Input Z Correction 6.2.12 All Screens Use Same Input 6.2.13 External Mixer Setup...
Page 26 Table Of Contents Coupling Clear Calibration 6.2.21.3 Calibrate I/Q Isolation Calibration I/Q Isolation Calibration Time (Remote Query Only) I Port I Port Probe Calibration Time (Remote Query Only) I-bar Port I-bar Port Probe Calibration Time (Remote Query Only) 6.2.21.4 Q Setup Q Same as I Differential Input Z...
Page 27 Table Of Contents 6.3.3 External Gain - BTS 6.3.4 I Ext Gain 6.3.5 Q Ext Gain 6.3.6 Q Gain in I+jQ 6.4 Data Source 6.4.1 Data Source 6.4.2 Current Meas -> Capture Buffer 6.5 Corrections 6.5.1 Select Correction 6.5.2 Correction On/Off 6.5.3 Correction Port 6.5.4 Correction Direction 6.5.5 Edit Correction...
Page 28 Table Of Contents 6.5.7.5 Correction Port 6.5.7.6 Direction 6.5.7.7 Description 6.5.7.8 Comment 6.5.7.9 File 6.5.7.10 Freq Interpolation (Remote Command Only) 6.5.7.11 Set Data (Remote Command Only) 6.5.8 Apply Corrections 6.5.9 Delete All Corrections 6.5.10 Correction Group On/Off 6.5.11 Break 6.5.12 Reload Corrections From Files 6.5.13 Edit Correction Group 6.5.13.1 Go to Row 6.5.13.2 Insert Row Below...
Page 29 Table Of Contents 6.6.5 Ref Lock BW 6.6.6 Reference Oscillator On/Off (Remote Command Only) 6.6.6.1 Select Ref 6.6.6.2 Freq Ref In 6.6.6.3 External Freq Ref 6.6.6.4 Ext Ref Locked (Remote Query Only) 6.7 Output 6.7.1 Analog Out 6.7.2 Screen Video Level 6.7.3 Digital Bus Out 6.7.4 Wideband Digital Bus 6.7.5 Data Stream...
Page 30 Table Of Contents 6.9.1.1 Cal Group 6.9.1.2 Calibrate Checked Rows 6.9.1.3 Apply Cal Group 6.9.1.4 Abort Calibration 6.9.1.5 Copy From Cal Group 6.9.1.6 Copy 6.9.1.7 Cal Input 6.9.1.8 Freq Offset 6.9.1.9 Select Calibrator 6.9.1.10 Identify RCal Module 6.9.1.11 RCal Module Serial Number (Remote Query Only) 6.9.1.12 RCal Reference 6.9.1.13 RCal Status RCal Status (Remote Query Only)
Page 31 Table Of Contents 6.9.1.32 Mech Atten Start 6.9.1.33 Mech Atten Stop 6.9.1.34 Mech Atten Step 6.9.1.35 Elec Atten Type 6.9.1.36 Elec Atten Start 6.9.1.37 Elec Atten Stop 6.9.1.38 Elec Atten Step 6.9.1.39 Full Range Atten Type 6.9.1.40 Full Range Atten Start 6.9.1.41 Full Range Atten Stop 6.9.1.42 Frequency Extender Attenuation Type 6.9.1.43 Frequency Extender Attenuation Start...
Page 32 Table Of Contents 6.10.5 Cal Comb Spacing 6.10.6 Calibrator Reference 6.11 Advanced 6.11.1 T/R Port High Power Attenuator 6.12 Aux I/O Control 6.12.1 Data 0 – Data 7 6.12.2 Aux IO Control (Remote Command Only) 7 Save/Recall/Print 7.1 Quick Save 7.2 Recall 7.2.1 Recall From File / Open 7.2.2 State...
Page 33 Table Of Contents 7.2.12 Sequence 7.2.13 Waveform 7.2.13.1 Load Segment to ARB Memory 7.2.13.2 Delete Segment From ARB Mem 7.2.13.3 Delete All From ARB Memory 7.2.13.4 Set Default Directory (Remote Command Only) 7.2.13.5 Query ARB Memory File List (Remote Query Only) 7.2.13.6 Query ARB Memory Full File List (Remote Query Only) 7.2.14 Power Sensor Cal Factor 7.2.15 Loss Comp...
Page 34 Table Of Contents 7.3.8.1 Save To File Saving a SCPI Recording as a Python Script 7.3.9 Mask 7.3.10 Waveform Sequence 7.3.11 Screen Image 7.3.11.1 Theme 7.3.12 Power Sensor Cal Factor 7.3.13 Remote Only Commands 7.3.13.1 Mass Storage Catalog (Remote Command Only) 7.3.13.2 Mass Storage Change Directory (Remote Command Only) 7.3.13.3 Mass Storage Copy (Remote Command Only) 7.3.13.4 Mass Storage Device Copy (Remote Command Only)
Page 35 Table Of Contents 8.1.1.4 Line 8.1.1.5 External 1 8.1.1.6 External 2 8.1.1.7 External 3 8.1.1.8 Audio External 8.1.1.9 RF Burst 8.1.1.10 Periodic 8.1.1.11 I/Q Mag 8.1.1.12 Input I 8.1.1.13 Input Q 8.1.1.14 I (Demodulated) 8.1.1.15 Q (Demodulated) 8.1.1.16 Aux I/Q Mag 8.1.1.17 PXI 8.1.1.18 Internal 8.1.1.19 Prot Channel Detection...
Page 36 Table Of Contents 8.1.17 Trigger BW 1015 8.1.18 Zero Span Delay Compensation On/Off 1016 8.1.19 Select PXI Line 1016 8.1.20 Reset Sync Monitor 1017 8.1.21 Trigger Optimization 1018 8.1.22 Trigger Settings Diagram 1019 8.2 Gate Source 1020 8.2.1 Select Gate Source 1020 8.2.2 Sync Holdoff 1021...
Page 37 Table Of Contents 9.1 List of Supported SCPI Commands 1043 1043 1043 1043 1048 1049 1050 1050 1051 1051 1052 1052 1052 1065 9.2 IEEE 488.2 Common Commands 1067 9.2.1 *CAL? - Calibration Query 1067 9.2.2 *CLS - Clear Status 1068 9.2.3 *ESE - Standard Event Status Enable 1068...
Page 38 Table Of Contents 9.3.2.1 CONFigure 1076 9.3.2.2 INITiate 1077 9.3.2.3 FETCh 1077 9.3.2.4 READ 1078 9.3.2.5 MEASure 1079 9.3.3 Trace Formatting Commands 1080 9.3.3.1 Clear Trace (Remote Command Only) 1080 9.3.3.2 Send/Query Trace Data (Remote Command Only) 1081 9.3.3.3 Format Data: Numeric Data (Remote Command Only) 1083 9.3.3.4 Format Data: Byte Order (Remote Command Only) 1084...
Page 39 Table Of Contents Operation Event Query 1112 Operation Negative Transition 1113 Operation Positive Transition 1113 9.4.6.4 Operation Instrument Register 1114 Operation Instrument Condition 1114 Operation Instrument Enable 1115 Operation Instrument Event Query 1115 Operation Instrument Negative Transition 1116 Operation Instrument Positive Transition 1116 9.4.6.5 Questionable Register 1117...
Page 40 Table Of Contents 9.4.6.11 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Register 1136 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Condition 1137 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Enable 1137 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Event Query 1138 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Negative Transition 1138 Questionable Calibration Extended Failure Positive Transition 1139 9.4.6.12 Questionable Calibration Skipped Register 1139...
Page 41 Table Of Contents 10.2.4 Detector Type 1159 10.2.5 Do Noise Correction 1159 10.2.6 Do Spur Suppression 1159 10.2.7 Electronic Attenuator Bypass 1160 10.2.8 Electronic Attenuation 1160 10.2.9 External Reference Frequency 1160 10.2.10 Frequency Reference Source 1161 10.2.11 IF Gain 1161 10.2.12 IF Type 1161 10.2.13 Include Power Spectrum...
Page 42 Table Of Contents 10.8 Binary Read Fast Power Measurement (Remote Command Only) 1173 10.9 Diagnostic Binary Read Fast Power Measurement (Remote Command Only) 1174 IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 43: Iq Analyzer Modeuser's & Programmer's Reference
X-Series Signal Analyzers IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference 1 Documentation Roadmap This section describes the Keysight products covered by this document, and provides links to related documentation. – "Products Covered by this Document" on page 44 – "Additional Documentation" on page 45...
Page 44: Products Covered By This Document
1 Documentation Roadmap 1.1 Products Covered by this Document 1.1 Products Covered by this Document For the full list of instrument models covered by this documentation, see the title page: "IQ Analyzer ModeUser's & Programmer's Reference" on page IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 45: Additional Documentation
– Users & Programmers Reference, in downloadable PDF format For information on this Mode, download from: http://literature.cdn.keysight.com/litweb/pdf/N9060-90042.pdf The following documents are available online at keysight.com: X-Series Messages Guide The following documents are in downloadable PDF format: Getting Started Guides, Instrument Messages & Security –...
Page 46 1 Documentation Roadmap 1.2 Additional Documentation – N9041B UXA Specifications Guide Measurement Guides – Spectrum Analyzer Mode Measurement Guide – Real-Time Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Guide – Noise Figure Measurement Guide – Analog Demod Measurement Application Measurement Guide – Phase Noise Measurement Application Measurement Guide –...
Page 47: User Interface
X-Series Signal Analyzers IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference 2 User Interface Here are the basic elements of the Multitouch User Interface. For more information, tap a topic. Included in this section are also topics for several front panel keys not described in other topics.
Page 48: Screen Tabs
2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs 2.1 Screen Tabs In the X-Series Multitouch User Interface (or Multitouch UI), you can run many different Measurement Applications, or “Modes”. Examples are Spectrum Analyzer Mode, LTE-A FDD Mode, IQ Analyzer Mode, and Real Time Spectrum Analyzer Mode.
Page 49: Mode/Meas/View Dialog
2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs The following topics provide more information: – "Mode/Meas/View Dialog" on page 49 – "Add Screen" on page 66 – "Multiscreen" on page 137 2.1.1 Mode/Meas/View Dialog The Mode/Meas/View dialog opens when you press the selected (blue) Screen tab (see "Screen Tabs"...
Page 50: Mode
2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs 2.1.1.1 Mode The first column in the Mode/Meas/View dialog allows you to select the desired Mode from those currently licensed in your instrument. Modes, also known as “measurement applications”, are collections of measurement capabilities packaged together to provide you with an instrument personality specific to your measurement needs.
Page 51 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs :INSTrument:SELect CONFigure commands separately. See "Mode and Measurement Select" on page :INSTrument[:SELect] <mode_id> Remote Command where <mode_id> is one of the values listed in "Index to Modes" on page 52 below :INSTrument[:SELect]? :INST SA Example :INST:CAT? Notes...
Page 52 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs :CONF commands Index to Modes The Mode Number in the table below is the parameter for use with the :INSTrument:NSELect command. The Mode Parameter is the parameter for use with the :INSTrument[:SELect] command. Your actual choices will depend upon which applications are installed in your instrument.
Page 53: Application Mode Remote Commands
Each application (Mode) that runs in an X-Series instrument consumes virtual memory. The various applications consume varying amounts of virtual memory, and as more applications run, the memory consumption increases. Keysight characterizes each Mode and assigns a memory usage quantity based on a conservative estimate.
Page 54: Current Application Model (Remote Command Only)
2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs :INST:CAT? Example Notes Query returns a quoted string of the installed and licensed modes separated with a comma. Example: "SA,PNOISE,WCDMA" :INSTrument:CATalog? INSTrument:SELECT Backwards VSA (E4406A): returned a list of installed items Compatibility as a comma separated list of string values, for example: Notes "BASIC","GSM","EDGEGSM","CDMA","SERVICE"...
Page 55: Current Application Options (Remote Command Only)
2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs Current Application Options (Remote Command Only) Returns a string that is the Options list of the currently selected application (Mode). This information is also displayed in the Show System screen :SYSTem:APPLication[:CURRent]:OPTion? Remote Command :SYST:APPL:OPT? Example Notes Query returns a quoted string that is the Option list of the currently selected application (Mode).
Page 56: Application Catalog Revision (Remote Command Only)
2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs Application Catalog Revision (Remote Command Only) Returns the Revision of the provided Model Number. :SYSTem:APPLication:CATalog:REVision? <model> Remote Command :SYST:APPL:CAT:REV? ‘N9060A’ Example Notes Returned value is a quoted string of revision for the provided Model Number. The revision will be a null- string ("") if the provided Model Number is not installed, licensed, and loaded.
Page 57: Gsm Mode Compatibility Command (Remote Command Only)
2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs GSM Mode compatibility command (Remote Command only) Provided for backwards compatibility. When this command is received, the analyzer aliases it to the following: :INST:SEL EDGEGSM :INSTrument[:SELect] GSM Remote Command :INST GSM Example SA compatibility command for EMC (Remote Command only) Provided for ESU compatibility.
Page 58: If Mode Compatibility Command For Emc (Remote Command Only)
2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs This results in the analyzer being placed in the EMI Receiver Mode, running the APD measurement, in order to emulate the ESU APD Mode. :INSTrument[:SELect] APDistribution Remote Command :INST APD Example IF Mode compatibility command for EMC (Remote Command only) Provided for ESU compatibility.
Page 59 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 60: Sequencer
2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs 2.1.1.5 Sequencer Allows multiple Screens to update sequentially while in "Multiscreen" on page 137 display mode. Each Screen updates in sequence, and when all have updated, the sequence will start again. To start the Sequencer, you must have more than one Screen defined, and you must have Multiscreen selected (see "Screen Tabs"...
Page 61 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs In the Sequencer block in the upper left hand corner, tap the Sequencing switch to turn it On: IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 62 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs The instrument will immediately exit the Mode/Meas/View Dialog and begin making measurements in each of the screens, one after the other. When a measurement is being made in a particular Screen, that Screen’s tab will be blue. Measurement being made in Screen 1: Measurement being made in Screen 2: IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 63: Screen Name
2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs Touching any key or control on the display will cause the Sequencer to stop, so that you can make desired changes. When this happens, the message “Sequencer stopped” is displayed. When the Sequencer is running, the screens update in the order in which they were created.
Page 64: Delete This Screen
2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs To reset the name, delete the screen name entirely. Each Screen Name must be unique; you cannot give the same name to more than one screen. :INSTrument:SCReen:REName <alphanumeric> Remote Command :INST:SCR:REN “Baseband” Example Notes The currently active screen is renamed.
Page 65: 89600 Vsa
2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs “This function will delete all defined screens and their settings, except for the current screen. This action cannot be undone. Do you want to proceed?” Pressing OK or Enter deletes the screen, pressing Cancel or ESC does not. :INSTrument:SCReen:DELete:ALL Remote Command...
Page 66: Add Screen
2.1 Screen Tabs functions – Easy-to-use Microsoft Windows graphical user interface For more information see the Keysight 89600 Series VSA web site at www.keysight.com/find/89600vsa To learn more about how to use the 89600 VSA in the instrument, start the 89600 VSA software, then open the 89600 VSA Help and navigate to the topic "About...
Page 67 2 User Interface 2.1 Screen Tabs If the display is disabled (via :DISP:ENAB OFF) then the error message “-221, Settings conflict; Screen SCPI cannot be used when Display is disabled” appears IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 68: Meas Bar
2 User Interface 2.2 Meas Bar 2.2 Meas Bar The Meas Bar is used to display annotation for the current measurement. There are three primary uses for the Meas Bar: 1. To show annotation for the most important parameters in the measurement so you can see them at a glance 2.
Page 69 2 User Interface 2.2 Meas Bar Settings that are colored amber are those that you need to be particularly aware of; for example, if Alignments are off, this is shown in amber, so you will know that you may not be meeting spec. Similarly, if DC coupling is on, this is shown amber, to alert you to be careful what voltage you put on the input.
Page 70 2 User Interface 2.2 Meas Bar LXI indicator This indicator displays in green when LAN is connected, in white when LAN is not connected, and in red when LAN is connected but has a connection problem. PASS/FAIL indicator This annunciator displays when Limits are turned on. It is green if all Limits are passing, and a red FAIL if any limit is not passing.
Page 71 2 User Interface 2.2 Meas Bar In the example above, trace 1 is active, visible, and in Average using the Sample detector, the other traces are inactive, blanked and in Clear/Write using the Normal detector. Tapping this panel drops down controls for the Traces. IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 72: Measurement Display
2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display 2.3 Measurement Display The Measurement Display contains one or more data windows displaying the result of the current measurement. These may be graphical or textual windows. Each window in the Measurement display contains a "Window Title"...
Page 73 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Measurements that support User Views (see "View Editor" on page 116) also display the Window Number in the Window Title, to enable window addressing from SCPI. The number is the number that will be used in the SCPI command to address that window, for example, in the WCDMA Mod Accuracy measurement, Code Domain Power is assigned window number 6, so you address it with the following SCPI command:...
Page 74 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Note also that the Window Data dropdown can be a cascaded list, if the number of available results requires categorization to hold them all: IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 75 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Note also that the Window Data dropdown sometimes includes controls for further configuring the window, for example, in LTE choosing the desired Component Carrier and Data format. IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 76: Measurement Data
2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Touching a window’s title dropdown also selects the window. 2.3.2 Measurement Data The Measurement Data region shows graphical or textual data for the Data selected in the Window Title Data control. Below you can see examples of both graphical and textual windows in a four-window display.
Page 77 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Swipe There are several swipe actions, as listed below. One of the most important actions is swiping a spectrum window to the left or right, or up or down, to adjust the frequency and level of the spectrum, as shown below. Swipe actions are summarized in the table below.
Page 78 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Object Action Toggle control Toggle in that direction Pinch You can also pinch in or out either horizontally or vertically to zoom in the x-axis or y-axis dimension. For example, a pinch horizontally lets you adjust the Span of the Spectrum window.
Page 79: Annotation Hotspot
2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Right Click on Lets you select Help the Background Right Click on a Lets you add or remove that control from the User Menu or get Help on that Menu Panel control control Tapping an object causes the actions defined in the table below: Object Action Marker...
Page 80 2 User Interface 2.3 Measurement Display Touching anywhere off the hotspot panel or pressing any hardkey except Save or Quick Save closes the hotspot panel. Annotation which is not currently able to be adjusted is not grayed out on the display, but the control in the hotspot that drops down or pops up is grayed out.
Page 81: Menu Panel
2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel 2.4 Menu Panel The menu panel is the main focus of the X-Series Multitouch user interface. The controls include active functions, dropdowns, action buttons, radio buttons and toggles. IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 82 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 83 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel The menu panel normally appears on the right side of the display and consists of a rectangular panel with multiple “sub-panels” lying on top of each other, each sub- panel being accessed by a tab on the right. You press a front panel key (or “hardkey”) to access a particular menu.
Page 84 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 85 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel If you move to a different menu panel or sub-panel and then come back to a previous panel, the previous panel is always reset to be scrolled all the way back to the top. Accessing Menus Without Using Front-Panel Keys You can access the menu panels without using the front panel keys, as you would need to do if you were operating the instrument using Remote Desktop.
Page 86 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel for example 13.255 GHz, as in the example below: An active function is “active” if the numeric value is surrounded by a black background with a blue border, as below. In this state, it is ready to receive numeric input from the number pad on the front panel, the knob, or the step keys.
Page 87 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel This causes the Numeric Entry Panel to pop up to receive the numbers you are typing: Type in as many digits as required, then touch one of the unit terminator buttons in the Numeric Entry Panel to complete the entry. In this case, 2 GHz was the desired entry, so you just touch the “GHz”...
Page 88 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel The Numeric Entry Panel disappears and, in the example, the active function value becomes 2 GHz. IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 89 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel It is important to note that you can always pop up the Numeric Entry Panel by touching an active function control while it is active; for example, if you were to touch it in the figure above, the Numeric Entry Panel would pop up right next to the control: IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 90 2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 91: Right-Click Menu
2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel You can display the Numeric Entry Panel by touching any active function control while it is active, but you don’t have to pop up the Numeric Entry Panel first, you can just start typing and it will pop up on its own, thus saving you a keystroke. You can also adjust a value without displaying the Numeric Entry panel by turning the knob or using the step keys while an active function is active.
Page 92: Add To Scpi Recorder
2 User Interface 2.4 Menu Panel 2.4.1.4 Add to SCPI Recorder Adds SCPI to the recorder from User Interface features that have equivalent SCPI. This is the manual mode for adding SCPI to the recorder when you do not wish to add SCPI continuously.
Page 93: Cancel Key
2 User Interface 2.5 Cancel key 2.5 Cancel key This front-panel key has the same functions as the Windows Esc (Escape) key. It does the following: – Cancels dialogs – Cancels active functions (unless there is an entry in progress, in which case it cancels that, and reverts to the previous value) –...
Page 94: Onscreen Keyboard Key
2 User Interface 2.6 Onscreen Keyboard key 2.6 Onscreen Keyboard key This key turns the onscreen alpha keyboard (OSK) on and off. There are two onscreen keyboards: – The Multitouch OSK, which pops up automatically if, while using the analyzer application, a text field becomes the active function –...
Page 95: Touch On/Off Key
2 User Interface 2.7 Touch On/Off Key 2.7 Touch On/Off Key This front-panel key turns the display touch functionality on and off. If off, you can turn it back on using the front panel Touch On/Off key. When the touch functionality is off, you can still use a mouse as a pointer.
Page 96: Tab Key
2 User Interface 2.8 Tab key 2.8 Tab key This key has the same function as the Tab key on a PC keyboard. You can use this key to display the Windows Taskbar, as follows. – Alt-Tab to the Desktop –...
Page 97: Local Button
2 User Interface 2.9 Local Button 2.9 Local Button Appears in the Menu Panel when the instrument is in remote, and can be brought back to local via the Local (ESC) Key. See also "Cancel key" on page IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 98: Control Bar
2 User Interface 2.10 Control Bar 2.10 Control Bar The Control Bar contains controls and readouts that let you control instrument functions independent of the current measurement. IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 99: Windows
2 User Interface 2.11 Windows 2.11 Windows Pressing the Windows icon on the "Control Bar" on page 98 has the same effect as pressing the Windows icon on the Windows taskbar. It displays the Windows taskbar and Start Menu, which allows you to launch Windows programs and access features such as the Control Panel.
Page 100: Undo/Redo
2 User Interface 2.12 Undo/Redo 2.12 Undo/Redo The Undo button in the "Control Bar" on page and the Undo front panel key, are used to undo the most recently executed function. If you Undo a function, and then decide you should not have done so, you can use the Redo button in the "Control Bar"...
Page 101 2 User Interface 2.12 Undo/Redo UNDO stack REDO stack Det = Peak RBW = 1MHz CF = 1 GHz When you press Undo, the top item on the Undo stack is removed, the action represented by that item is undone, and the item is placed on the Redo stack. So pressing Undo once in the above case would undo the setting of the peak detector, and the stacks would look like this: UNDO stack...
Page 102 2 User Interface 2.12 Undo/Redo For example, in the example above, if you now were to change another setting, such as VBW = 1 kHz, the Redo stack gets cleared, and the stacks would look like this: UNDO stack REDO stack VBW = 1 kHz RBW = 1MHz CF = 1 GHz...
Page 103 2 User Interface 2.12 Undo/Redo When you press the Redo icon or Ctl and the Undo hardkey, you are notified with an advisory popup message; for example, if the Center Frequency had been 300 MHz, and you changed it to 1 GHz and then pressed Undo, the message would say: UNDO: Center Freq 1 GHz ->...
Page 104: File Functions
2 User Interface 2.13 File Functions 2.13 File Functions The File Functions popup contains controls for executing Save, Recall, File and Print operations. You display the File Functions popup by tapping the File Functions icon in the "Control Bar" on page For more information on a control, tap an icon in the image below.
Page 105: Help
2 User Interface 2.14 Help 2.14 Help Pressing the Help button in the "Control Bar" on page 98, the Help front panel key, or the F1 key if you have a PC keyboard connected, opens the context-sensitive help system. The Help button appears in the "Control Bar"...
Page 106: Status Bar
2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar 2.15 Status Bar The Status Panel (or Status Bar) appears at the bottom of the display and contains three fields: The Message Balloon appears on the left side of the Status Panel and lets you know when there is an unread message in the queue.
Page 107 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar The triangle is unfilled if no there are no open conditions, filled with yellow if all open conditions are warnings, and filled with red if at least one open condition is an error. The number displayed is the total number of open conditions. Touching the Condition Indicator opens up the Show Status dialog (see below) with the Current Conditions tab selected.
Page 108 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar If the display fills up, scrolling is enabled just as in other X-Series Multi-touch UI displays. The Status dialog automatically refreshes as new messages and conditions occur. At the bottom of the screen is a Clear Message Queue button. This button clears all errors in all error queues.
Page 109 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar <Error Number>,<Error> Where <Error Number> <Error> are those shown on the Show Errors screen Backwards In some legacy analyzers, the Repeat field shows the number of times the message has repeated since Compatibility the last time the error queue was cleared. In the X-Series, the Repeat field shows the number of times Notes the error has repeated since the last intervening error.
Page 110 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar The fields on the History display are: Type Displays the icon identifying the event or condition as an error or warning Displays the error number Message Displays the message text Repeat (RPT) This field shows the number of consecutive instances of the event, uninterrupted by other events.
Page 111 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar peak found” – A condition is an occurrence of finite duration, that is, it has a start and an end. Conditions are states of the analyzer characterized by some combination of settings or some kind of failure that the user needs to be told about while it is happening, but then can stop being told once it goes away;...
Page 112 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar The fields on the Current Conditions display are: Type Displays the icon identifying the event or condition as an error or warning or informational Displays the error number Message Displays the message text Time Shows the most recent time (including the date) at which the event occurred.
Page 113 2 User Interface 2.15 Status Bar IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 114: Block Diagram
2 User Interface 2.16 Block Diagram 2.16 Block Diagram When you press the Block Diagram button in the "Control Bar" on page 98, the display changes to a stylized pictorial representation of the current internal hardware setup and signal processing path. When you touch one of the blocks on the Block Diagram, the corresponding menu panel opens.
Page 115 2 User Interface 2.16 Block Diagram And here is the Block Diagram when the I/Q inputs are selected: IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 116: View Editor
2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor 2.17 View Editor This section describes the use of the View Editor, which allows you to: – Add windows to and delete windows from the current measurement – Resize and rearrange windows – Create User Views User Views are custom Views that you create by adding, deleting, rearranging, resizing, or changing the contents of the windows in an existing View, and then saving the edited View as a new View.
Page 117 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 118 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 119 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor You can save an edited View using the Save Layout as New View control in the View menu (see "To Save a User View" on page 129). On occasion, the instrument may automatically save an edited View for you. If you have edited a View, so that the * is displaying next to the View name, you must save that View as a User View before you save State or switch measurements.
Page 120: To Create A User View
2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor To Close the View Editor Tap the View Editor button again. The user chooses the desired View through the use of the Mode/Meas/View dialog (see "Mode/Meas/View Dialog" on page 49) or the View menu (a tab under the Display key).
Page 121 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor When you do this, you get the View Editor screen, which appears as below. The menu panel switches to the View menu. Here we see that we are in the Predefined View called “Basic”. Each window has two arrows containing + signs.
Page 122 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor A fifth window has been added, and is automatically assigned the number 5. (The window number, which is displayed in the Window Title region, is used when sending SCPI commands to that window). Note the * that now appears next to Basic in the View menu, indicating that you are now in the modified Basic View.
Page 123 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor A panel drops down, containing a Data control for specifying window results. Some measurements, such as LTE-A in this example, also provide controls on this dropdown for specifying other window parameters, such as the Component Carrier and Data Format, Tap the Data control and you will see a list of available results for the window.
Page 124 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor Choose the result you want and tap OK. Here we have chosen IQ Meas Time from the Demod group: Your new, edited User View is now ready to use. IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 125: To Resize Or Rearrange Windows In A View
2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor 2.17.2 To Resize or Rearrange Windows in a View Sometimes you may wish to resize a window. To do this go back into the View Editor and note the large, translucent white circles along the edges of the draggable borders.
Page 126 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor The outline of the window appears as it is being dragged. When you start to drag a window, target symbols appear in the other windows: If you drop a window on one of the targets, it swaps positions with the target window.
Page 127 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor When you hover over one of the stripes it gets dimmer, to show the position the window being dragged will take on. If you release a window over an inner stripe, the window you are dragging and the window over which you were hovering resize to share the space the target window originally occupied.
Page 128: To Delete A Window From A View
2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor In either case, one or more of the remaining windows resize to occupy the space formerly occupied by the window you were dragging. 2.17.3 To Delete a Window from a View The View Editor also lets you delete a window. To do this, tap one of the circled red X’s, as shown below.
Page 129: To Save A User View
2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor When you are finished with it, you can restore the Layout to the default for Basic by pressing “Restore Layout to Default”. Or you can save your edited View as a “User View” (if you exit the measurement without saving the edited View, the instrument will save it for you as a User View called “Autosaved”).
Page 130 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor When you tap “Done”, the View is saved: Notice the User View region which has appeared on the menu panel above, with the new User View called “My New View. Notice also that “Basic” has returned to its original, unedited state and the * is gone from its name.
Page 131 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor Layout to Default” is grayed out. Note also that if you go to the Mode/Meas dialog, you will see the User View there as well: When naming a new View, you must choose a name that is not already in use for any User View in any measurement;...
Page 132 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor The following is a full list of all MeasName parameters. Measurement Name SCPI ID ACPower ACP, Adjacent Channel Power AM Depth Amplitude Probability Distribution AUDDist Audio Distortion AUDFreq Audio Frequency AUDLevel Audio Level AUDSinad Audio SINAD Automatic Direction Finder CHPower...
Page 133 2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor Measurement Name SCPI ID LSEQuencer List Sequencer LIST List Sweep LPLot Log Plot LORA LoRa (CSS) Demodulation Marker Beacon Mod Accuracy Modulation Analysis MODDist Modulation Distortion MODRate Modulation Rate MODSinad Modulation SINAD MONitor Monitor Spectrum NFIGure Noise Figure OBWidth...
Page 134: To Rename A User View
2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor Measurement Name SCPI ID Transmit Analysis PVTime Transmit On/Off Power TXPower Transmit Power (Burst Power) TRFLevel Tuned RF Level TTRF Tuned RF Level with Tracking ETSPur Tx Band Spur VHF Omni-Directional Range Examples: – The User View file for the Swept SA measurement is SA.SANalyzer.layout –...
Page 135: To Delete All User Views
2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor 3. Select the View tab 4. Tap Delete User View 2.17.7 To Delete All User Views You can delete all User Views by tapping “Delete All User Views.” The default view becomes the current view for the Measurement if a User View was the current view when this control was pressed.
Page 136: View Editor Remote Commands
2 User Interface 2.17 View Editor selected in the View menu. These switches are grayed out if you are in a modified View or a User View. Since only one of these switches can be on at a time, and because these switches turn off on a Preset, User Views offer a superior way of adding windows than using the switches.
Page 137: Multiscreen
2 User Interface 2.18 Multiscreen 2.18 Multiscreen You can configure up to 16 different Screens at a time. Normally, you only see one Screen, and the set of configured screens is shown across the top of the display in a series of "Screen Tabs"...
Page 138 2 User Interface 2.18 Multiscreen While in Multiscreen View, the button changes from a black background to a blue background: To exit Multiscreen view, tap the button again. Multiscreen View cannot be activated if only one screen is configured. Each Screen contains one Mode, each Mode contains one Measurement, and each Measurement contains a number of Windows arranged in Views.
Page 139: Select Screen
2 User Interface 2.18 Multiscreen – Each Screen has a tab that contains the name of the Mode and Measurement in the box and a number associated with the instance of that Mode. You can enter a custom Screen name that replaces the Mode name, by going into the Mode/Meas dialog –...
Page 140: Screen List (Remote Only Command)
2 User Interface 2.18 Multiscreen Preset Returns the name of the active screen 2.18.2 Screen List (Remote only command) You can obtain a list of currently configured Screens. This permits your remote program to manage screens for selection, renaming, or deletion. :INSTrument:SCReen:CATalog? Remote Command...
Page 141: Fullscreen
2 User Interface 2.19 Fullscreen 2.19 Fullscreen The Fullscreen button is in the "Control Bar" on page 98, at the lower right corner of the display. When Full Screen is pressed the measurement window expands horizontally over the entire instrument display. The screen graticule area expands to fill the available display area.
Page 142: Iq Analyzer (Basic) Mode
X-Series Signal Analyzers IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode IQ Analyzer Mode makes general purpose frequency domain and time domain measurements. These measurements often use alternate hardware signal paths when compared with a similar measurement in the Signal Analyzer Mode using the Swept SA measurement.
Page 143: Complex Spectrum Measurement
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement The Complex Spectrum measurement provides wideband FFT-based spectrum analysis capability for the instrument. The control of the measurement was designed to be familiar to those who are accustomed to using swept spectrum analyzers. The measurement uses digital signal processing to sample the input signal and convert it to the frequency domain.
Page 144 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement [n]? the measurement, then retrieves the data specified by :READ:SPECtrum[n]? Starts the measurement, then retrieves the data specified by Remote Command Results The following table lists results returned by the :FETCh, :MEASure, and :READ queries, depending on the specified value of n.
Page 145 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Return Value frequency) Not used Returns a trace containing the shape of the FFT window Returns trace data of the phase of the FFT versus frequency Returns comma-separated linear spectrum trace data in Volts RMS Returns comma-separated averaged linear spectrum trace data in Volts RMS Returns the following comma-separated scalar results: Item...
Page 146: Views
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Return Value Item Unit, if any Averaged delta phase at the averaged FFT trace peak magnitude radians frequency –999 when I/Q Magnitude and Phase Delta Results not available Averaged delta phase at the averaged FFT trace peak magnitude °...
Page 147: Windows
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement 3.1.2 Windows The following windows are available in the Complex Spectrum measurement. Spectrum Window The Spectrum window is the fundamental window used in the Complex Spectrum measurement. It displays Amplitude versus frequency information (or, in Zero Span, amplitude versus time).
Page 148: Amplitude
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement I/Q Waveform The I/Q Waveform Window shows the I and Q traces of the input signal in the time domain. Marker Trace Corresponding Returns the averaged trace data of log-magnitude versus time, (that is, the RF Trace envelope) (n=5) The I/Q Waveform window in the Normal View, is as follows:...
Page 149: Scale/Div
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Couplings When "Auto Scaling" on page 150 (default), this value is automatically determined by the measurement result. When you set a value manually, Auto Scaling changes to In Complex Spectrum, unlike some measurements, Attenuation is not coupled to the Ref Value Preset 0.00 dBm State Saved...
Page 150: Auto Scaling
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Remote Complex Spectrum: Command :DISPlay:SPECtrum:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition TOP | CENTer | BOTTom :DISPlay:SPECtrum:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition? Streaming: :DISPlay:STReaming:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition TOP | CENTer | BOTTom :DISPlay:STReaming:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition? :DISP:SPEC:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:Y:RPOS CENT Example :DISP:SPEC:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:Y:RPOS? Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state TOP|CENTer|BOTTom Range Annotation The greater than (>) and less than (<) symbols are displayed on both sides of the graph to indicate the...
Page 151 Meas Preset. Only available when the hardware set includes an input attenuator, which is typically only the case for Keysight’s benchtop instruments. For example, this tab does not appear in VXT models M9420A/10A/11A/15A/16A, M9410E/11E/15E/16E, nor in UXM. In UXM, all Attenuation and Range settings are disabled, as the expected input power level is handled by the Call Processing App that drives the DUT power control.
Page 152: Full Range Atten
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Configuration 1 without the Electronic Attenuator Option EA3, therefore for the sake of this document it is grouped into the “Dual-Attenuator” configuration. Single-Attenuator Configuration You can tell which attenuator configuration you have by pressing the Attenuation tab, which (in most Modes) opens the Attenuation menu.
Page 153: Mech Atten
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:FRATten <rel_ampl> Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:FRATten? :POW:FRAT 14 Example :POW:FRAT? Notes When you enter an amplitude value that falls between valid values, the value will be incremented to the next smallest valid value Dependencies Only appears if input RF is selected, RF Input Port 2 is selected, and the Full Range Attenuator exists Couplings...
Page 154 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement External Gain that is entered, and Max Mixer Level (if available), as described in the table below. "Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man" on page 155 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation <rel_ampl> Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation? :POW:ATT 20 Example Dual-Attenuator configuration: sets the mechanical attenuator to 20 dB Single-Attenuator mode: sets the main attenuation to 20 dB (see below for definition of “main”...
Page 155 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement If the current mechanical attenuation is below 6 dB, it can be increased with the knob and step keys, but not decreased CXA Option 503 or 507 50 dB 60 dB All other models 70 dB Note that in the Single-Attenuator configuration, the total of ATT and EATT cannot exceed 50 dB.
Page 156: Elec Atten
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement In Single-Attenuator configurations, we refer to the attenuation set using "Mech Atten" on page 153 (or :POW:ATT) as the “main” attenuation; and the attenuation that is set by :POW:EATT as the “soft” attenuation (:POW:EATT is honored even in the Single-Attenuator configuration, for compatibility purposes).
Page 157 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement :POW:EATT? Notes Electronic Attenuation’s specification is defined only when Mech Atten is 6 dB Dependencies Only appears in Dual-Attenuator models with an Electronic Attenuator installed and licensed. Does not appear in models with the Single-Attenuator configuration, because in the Single-Attenuator configuration there is no “electronic attenuator”;...
Page 158 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement to 24 dB first, the main attenuation cannot be greater than 26 dB and will be reduced accordingly; if the main attenuator is set to 40 dB first, EATT cannot be greater than 10 dB Annotation See Annotation under the Mech Atten control description Auto Function...
Page 159 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement – The Mechanical Attenuator is initialized to 10 dB (this is its optimal performance setting). You can then set it as desired with SCPI, numeric keypad, step keys, or knob, and it behaves as it normally would in manual mode –...
Page 160: Mech Atten Step
EXA, CXA and CXA-m: 10 dB (2 dB with option FSA) All other models: 2 dB State Saved Saved in instrument state 3.1.3.3 Range (Non-attenuator models) Only available for Keysight’s modular signal analyzers and certain other Keysight products, such as VXT and M941xE. IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 161: Range
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement State Saved Range Represents the amplitude of the largest sinusoidal signal that could be present within the IF without being clipped by the ADC. For signals with high peak-to- average ratios, the range may need to exceed the rms signal power by a significant amount to avoid clipping.
Page 162: Peak-To-Average Ratio
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize:ATTenuation OFF | ON | ELECtrical | Remote Command COMBined [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize:ATTenuation? Notes Because there is no attenuator control available in these models, the control displays only choices. However, for SCPI compatibility with other platforms, all three parameters (ELECtrical, COMBined, and ON) are honored and all are mapped to ELECtrical, so if any of these three parameters is sent, a subsequent query will return ELEC...
Page 163: Mixer Lvl Offset
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement :POW:RANG:PAR 12 dB Example Notes In some Modes, this parameter is read-only; meaning the value will appear on the control and query via SCPI, but is not changeable. In such applications the control is grayed-out. Attempts to change the value via SCPI are ignored, but no error message is generated Dependencies Does not appear in Spectrum Analyzer Mode...
Page 164: I Range
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Each input channel (I and Q) has four internal gain ranges. The maximum allowed voltage in each gain range is slightly more than the nominal value, so the break point between ranges is a few millivolts higher than the nominal (setting a peak voltage of 0.502 mV will still map to the 0.5 V Peak range).
Page 165: Q Range
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement "Rng: 1 V Peak" the I Range is 1 V Peak "Rng: 1 V, 0.5 V " the I Range is 1 V Peak and the Q Range is 0.5 V Peak This is an alternate form of the command to allow entry as a power.
Page 166: Q Same As I
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Changing the value also sets Range = Man Preset 1 V Peak State Saved Saved in instrument state Range 1 V Peak (10 dBm @ 50Ω) | 0.5 V Peak (4 dBm @ 50Ω) | 0.25 V Peak (-2 dBm @ 50Ω) | 0.125 V Peak (-8 dBm @ 50Ω) 0.125 V Annotation...
Page 167: Signal Path
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement channel values are copied to the Q channel, so at the time Q Same as I is Off, the I and Q channel setups will be identical. [:SENSe]:VOLTage|POWer:IQ:MIRRored OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command [:SENSe]:VOLTage|POWer:IQ:MIRRored?
Page 168 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PCENter Remote Command :POW:PCEN Example Notes The rules outlined above under the control description apply for the remote command as well as the key. The result of the command depends on marker position, etc. Any message generated by the control press is also generated in response to the remote command Dependencies Does not appear in CXA-m, nor in VXT Models M9410A/11A/15A/16A, M9410E/11E/15E/16E...
Page 169: Preselector Adjust
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement 3. In some models, the preselector can be bypassed. If it is bypassed, no centering is attempted in that range and a message is generated Preselector Adjust Lets you manually adjust the preselector filter frequency to optimize its response to the signal of interest.
Page 170: Internal Preamp
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Backwards Compatibility Command MWAVe Notes The command has no effect, and the query always returns [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust:PRESelector MWAVe | MMWave | EXTernal Backwards Compatibility [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:PADJust:PRESelector? SCPI Internal Preamp Accesses a menu of controls for the internal preamps. Turning on the preamp gives a better noise figure, but a poorer inter-modulation distortion (TOI) to noise floor dynamic range.
Page 171: Lna
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement reach the Low Band maximum frequency. In these cases, N/A is displayed in the square brackets for Low Band. [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN:BAND LOW | FULL Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN:BAND? :POW:GAIN:BAND LOW Example :POW:GAIN:BAND? Dependencies Not available on all hardware platforms.
Page 172: Μw Path Control
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement (distortion) specifications are impacted. The sensitivity improvement of this combination is substantial when operating in high band (frequencies above 3.6 GHz). For more details about annotation, see "More Information" on page 172 [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN:LNA[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN:LNA[:STATe]?
Page 173 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement that can contribute to noise, when it is appropriate based on other instrument settings. For most applications, the preset state is Standard Path, which provides the best remote-control throughput, minimizes acoustic noise from switching and minimizes the risk of wear in the hardware switches, particularly in remote test scenarios where both low band and high band setups will follow in rapid succession.
Page 174 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement The DC Block will always be switched in when the low noise path is switched in, to protect succeeding circuitry from DC. Note that this does not mean “when the low noise path is enabled” but when, based on the Low Noise Path rules, the path is actually switched in.
Page 175 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement µW Path: Bypass If Full Bypass Enable is selected but the LNP switch is not thrown: µW Path: FByp,Off If Full Bypass Enable is selected and the LNP switch is thrown: µW Path: FByp,On µW Path Control Auto In VMA, WLAN, 5G NR, CQM Modes, an Auto/Man switch is added to µW Path...
Page 176 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Analysis Spectral Flatness Always Presel Bypasss Power vs Time Always Presel Bypass Monitor Spectrum Always Presel Bypass IQ Waveform Always Presel Bypass Channel Power Always Presel Bypass Occupied BW Always Presel Bypass CCDF...
Page 177 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior and “Allow Full Bypass in Auto” is On ), otherwise choose Preselector Bypass Monitor Spectrum Always Standard Path IQ Waveform Use Standard Path unless tuned frequency > 3.6 GHz and IFBW > 15 MHz, in which case choose Preselector Bypass CCDF Use Standard Path unless tuned frequency >...
Page 178 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Note that the Low Noise Path, while giving improved DANL, has the disadvantage of decreased TOI performance and decreased gain compression performance relative to the standard path. Note also that the bypass switch is a mechanical switch and has finite life, so if the Low Noise Path Enable is selected, it is possible to cause frequent cycling of this switch by frequently changing instrument settings such that the above conditions hold true only some of the time.
Page 179 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement There are other times where selecting the low noise path improves performance, too. Compression-limited measurements such as finding the nulls in a pulsed-RF spectrum can profit from the low noise path in a way similar to the TOI-limited measurement illustrated.
Page 180 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Option MPB or pre-selector bypass provides an unpreselected input mixer path for certain X-Series signal analyzers with frequency ranges above 3.6 GHz. This signal path allows a wider bandwidth and less amplitude variability, which is an advantage when doing modulation analysis and broadband signal analysis.
Page 181 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement whenever Full Bypass Enable is selected, a warning message appears in the status bar: “Full Bypass Enabled, maximum safe input power reduced” Microwave Preselector Bypass Backwards Compatibility Example Bypass the microwave preselector: :POW:MW:PRES OFF Notes Included for Microwave Preselector Bypass backwards compatibility...
Page 182: Software Preselection
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Settings Alert message in the error queue Software Preselection Provided in some instruments, either to compensate for issues with provided hardware preselection or to provide the preselection function when there is no hardware preselector.
Page 183: Sw Preselection Type
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Note that for N9042B+V3050A, in the Swept SA measurement, Software Preselection works even if the measurement is using an FFT Sweep Type. In measurements other than Swept SA, Software Preselection is not used if the measurement is using an FFT Sweep Type.
Page 184: Sw Preselection Bw
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Two hidden sweeps occur in succession. The second sweep is offset in LO frequency by 2 * IF / N. For each point in each trace, the smaller amplitude from the two traces is taken and placed in that point in the selected trace.
Page 185: High Freq Prefilter
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement wideband signals with occupied bandwidths up to 2 GHz. This increases the risk of images failing to be rejected, but improves the measurement speed [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:SWPResel:BW NORMal | NARRow Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:SWPResel:BW? :POW:SWPR:BW NARR Example Dependencies Only appears in N9041B and N9042B+V3050A.
Page 186: Settings
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state Prefilter Presets Meas Mode Preset SPEC BASIC BASIC, WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA WCDMA WCDMA PCON WCDMA EVMQ WCDMA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA WCDMA, WLAN, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR, VMA, SA...
Page 187 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement sweep time (measurement capture length). If the function is auto-coupled, the value setting is ignored. Remote Complex Spectrum: Command [:SENSe]:SPECtrum:BANDwidth[:RESolution] <bandwidth> [:SENSe]:SPECtrum:BANDwidth[:RESolution]? Streaming: [:SENSe]:STReaming:BANDwidth[:RESolution] <bandwidth> [:SENSe]:STReaming:BANDwidth[:RESolution]? :SPEC:BAND 100 Example :SPEC:BAND? Preset 160 kHz State Saved 0.2 Hz...
Page 188: Display
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement 3.1.5 Display Lets you configure display items for the current Mode, Measurement View or Window. 3.1.5.1 View Contains controls for selecting the current View, and for editing User Views. View "Views" on page 146.
Page 189: Restore Layout To Default
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Backwards The legacy node Compatibility :DISPlay:VIEW[:SELect] SCPI is retained for backwards compatibility, but it only supports predefined views Restore Layout to Default Restores the Layout to the default for Basic. Modified Views are very temporary; if you exit the current measurement they are discarded, and they are not saved in State.
Page 190: Rename User View
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Rename User View You can rename the current View by giving it a new unique name. Only User Views can be renamed, if the current View is a Predefined View, an error occurs. :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:REName <alphanumeric>...
Page 191: View Editor Remote Commands
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement :DISP:VIEW:ADV:DEL:ALL Example Notes Disabled if there are no User Views View Editor Remote Commands The following remote commands help you manage Views and User Views. Note that the SCPI node for User Views handles both Predefined and User Views. The legacy nodes, :DISPlay:VIEW[:SELect] and :DISPlay:VIEW:NSEL, are retained for...
Page 192: Annotation
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement 3.1.5.2 Annotation Contains controls for setting up the annotation for the current Mode or Measurement. Graticule Turns the display graticule On or Off for all windows with graticules in all measurements in the current Mode. Also turns the graticule Y-Axis annotation on and off.
Page 193: Trace Annotation
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Trace Annotation Turns on and off the labels on the traces, showing their detector (or their Math Mode) as described in the Trace section, for all windows in all measurements in the current Mode for which Trace Annotation on/off is supported.
Page 194: Display Enable (Remote Command Only)
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement :DISP:ANN:MBAR OFF Example Dependencies Grayed out and forced to when System Display Settings, Annotation is Preset This remains through a Preset when System Display Settings, Annotation is set to State Saved Saved in instrument state Display Enable (Remote Command Only) Turns the display on/off, including the display drive circuitry.
Page 195: Frequency
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Name Command :INSTrument:SCReen:DELete:ALL Delete All But This Screen :INSTrument:SCReen:CREate Add Screen :INSTrument:SCReen:REName Rename Screen :SYSTem:SEQuencer Sequencer On/Off :DISPlay:ENABle OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :DISPlay:ENABle? :DISP:ENAB OFF Example Couplings :DISP:ENAB OFF turns Backlight...
Page 196 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Start/Stop annotation mode, Start Freq and Stop Freq are displayed below the graticule instead of Center Frequency and Span. Pressing Center Frequency also sets the frequency entry mode to Center/Span. In Center/Span mode, the center frequency and span values are displayed below the graticule, and the default active function in the Frequency menu is Center Frequency.
Page 197 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Dependencies Center Frequency can be limited by Start Freq or Stop Freq limits, if Span is so large that start or stop reach their limits Couplings When operating in “swept span”, any value of Center Frequency or Span that is within the frequency range of the instrument is allowed, if the value is being set through the front panel numeric key pad or the SCPI command.
Page 198 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Freq Option CF after Mode Stop Freq after Mode Max Freq (can't tune Preset Preset above) 6.805 GHz 13.6 GHz 13.8 GHz 526 (except CXA and 13.255 GHz 26.5 GHz 27.0 GHz* MXE) 526 (CXA) 13.255 GHz...
Page 199 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Tracking Generator Frequency Limits (CXA only) Tracking Min Freq If above this Freq, Stop Freq Max Freq (clips to this freq when turn (can't tune Generator clipped to this Freq when TG TG on and can’t tune below above) Option...
Page 200 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Instrument Types Value VXT model M9421A 55.000005 MHz VXT models M9410A/11A 6.505 kHz with Option 330.000005 MHz without Option LFE 330.000005 MHz VXT model M9415A 330.000005 MHz M8920A 80.005 kHz All other instruments –79.999995 MHz Unless Source Mode is set to Tracking, in which case it is limited by the minimum frequency of the Source See table above.
Page 201: Span
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement highest harmonic range in the Harmonic Table. Center Frequency thus presets to the point arithmet- ically equidistant from these two frequencies Note that, if the current measurement has a limited Span available to it, and cannot achieve the span shown in the table (Span = Stop Freq –...
Page 202 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement data acquisition time If the electrical attenuator is enabled, any attempt to set Span such that the Stop Frequency would be >3.6 GHz disables the Electrical Attenuator. It remains disabled if you then set Center Frequency below 3.6 GHz Preset 8 MHz...
Page 203: Marker
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Model Input Option Value All other models None 8.0 MHz 25 MHz 40 MHz 85 MHz 125 MHz 140 MHz 160 MHz 255 MHz 510 MHz 1 GHz 1.5 GHz 2 GHz 4 GHz None 10.0 MHz per channel...
Page 204: Settings
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Notes The selected marker is remembered even when not in the Marker menu and is used if a search is done, or if a Band Function is turned on, or for Signal Track or Continuous Peak Preset Marker 1 State Saved...
Page 205 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Marker X-Axis Position (Remote Command Only) Sets the marker X-Axis Scale position in trace points. Has no effect if the control mode is OFF, but is the SCPI equivalent of entering a value if the control mode is POSition or DELTa.
Page 206: Marker Mode
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement >:CALC: SPEC:MARK1:Y? -3.006944493834E-003,+9.9870666467354E-004 The IQ selection is for backwards-compatibility. Use the I and/or Q selection for new designs Preset Result depends on Marker setup and signal source State Saved Backwards Not supported in STReaming measurement Compatibility...
Page 207: Delta Marker (Reset Delta)
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement :CALC:SPEC:MARK3:STAT? Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state OFF|ON Range Backwards Complex Spectrum: Compatibility :CALCulate:SPECtrum:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:STATe OFF | ON | 0 | 1 SCPI :CALCulate:SPECtrum:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:STATe? Streaming: :CALCulate:STReaming:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:STATe OFF | ON | 0 | 1 :CALCulate:STReaming:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:STATe? Delta Marker (Reset Delta) Pressing this control has exactly the same effect as pressing Delta in...
Page 208: Peak Search
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement This may result in markers going off screen. Remote Complex Spectrum: Command :CALCulate:SPECtrum:MARKer:COUPle[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 :CALCulate:SPECtrum:MARKer:COUPle[:STATe]? Streaming: :CALCulate:STReaming:MARKer:COUPle[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 :CALCulate:STReaming:MARKer:COUPle[:STATe]? :CALC:SPEC:MARK:COUP ON Example :CALC:SPEC:MARK:COUP?
Page 209: Peak Search
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Peak Search Moves the selected marker to the trace point that has the maximum Y-Axis value for that marker’s trace. Pressing the Peak Search hardkey automatically moves you to the Peak Search NOTE page of the Marker menu and performs a peak search.
Page 210: Next Peak
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Next Peak Moves the selected marker to the peak that is next lower in amplitude than the current marker value. Only peaks that meet all enabled peak criteria are considered. If there is no valid peak lower than the current marker position, a “No peak found” message is generated, and the marker is not moved.
Page 211: Minimum Peak
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement If the selected marker was OFF, then it is turned on as a POSition marker and a peak search is performed. Remote Command Complex Spectrum: :CALCulate:SPECtrum:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:MAXimum:LEFT Streaming: :CALCulate:STReaming:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:MAXimum:LEFT :CALC:SPEC:MARK2:MAX:LEFT Example State Saved Not part of saved state Minimum Peak Moves the selected marker to the minimum Y-Axis value on the current trace.
Page 212: Marker Delta
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Remote Command Complex Spectrum: :CALCulate:SPECtrum:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:PTPeak Streaming: :CALCulate:STReaming:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:PTPeak :CALC:SPEC:MARK:PTP Example Notes Turns on the Marker D active function Sending this command selects the subopcoded marker Dependencies Not available when Couple Markers is Couplings The selected marker becomes a DELTa...
Page 213 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement use of the peak criteria rules. If no valid peak is found, a “No peak found” message is generated after each sweep. "More Information" on page 213. Remote Complex Spectrum: Command :CALCulate:SPECtrum:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:CPSearch[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 :CALCulate:SPECtrum:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:CPSearch[:STATe]? Streaming:...
Page 214: Pk Search Config
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement 3.1.7.4 Pk Search Config Contains controls that allow you to setup the Peak Search functions. Since the Pk Search Config functions are independent of the selected Marker, the Select Marker control does not display while in Pk Search Config. Pk Threshold Lets you turn the peak threshold requirement on/off and sets the threshold value.
Page 215: Pk Excursion
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement :CALCulate:SPECtrum:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold? Streaming: :CALCulate:STReaming:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold <ampl> :CALCulate:STReaming:MARKer:PEAK:THReshold? :CALC:SPEC:MARK:PEAK:THR:STAT ON Example Turns on the threshold criterion :CALC:SPEC:MARK:PEAK:THR –60 dBm Sets the threshold to –60 dBm Dependencies When Ref Level Offset changes, Pk Threshold must change by the same amount Couplings Whenever you adjust the value of Pk Threshold, "Pk Threshold Line"...
Page 216 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement In the event that a sequence of trace points with precisely the same values NOTE represents the maximum, the leftmost point is found. If a signal comes onto the screen falling and falls all the way to the threshold without ever rising, it is considered a peak at the far-left edge of the display.
Page 217: Pk Threshold Line
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement of these two signals as a peak (or next peak). However, if a signal appears near the edge of the screen such that the full extent of either the rising or falling edge cannot be determined, and the portion that is on screen does not meet the excursion criteria, then the signal cannot be identified as a peak.
Page 218: Peak Search Mode
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement This function is automatically set to (thus turning on Peak Threshold Line) whenever the value of Pk Threshold or Pk Excursion becomes the active function, unless Pk Threshold is OFF. It is automatically set to whenever Pk Threshold is set to OFF.
Page 219: Query The Signal Peaks (Remote Query Only)
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement The Peak Search type simply finds the highest point on the trace, subject to the peak-search qualifications. However, using Peak Search Mode, you can change the Peak Search type so that it also uses the Excursion and Threshold criteria.
Page 220: Query Number Of Peaks Found (Remote Query Only)
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement peak. To get the number of signals found meeting the specified limits, use :TRACe:MATH:PEAK:POINts? :TRAC:MATH:PEAK? Example Identifies the peaks of trace 1 that are above the Peak Threshold (if Pk Threshold is ON) and have an excursion above the Peak Excursion (if Pk Excursion is ON) :TRACe:MATH:PEAK[:DATA]? Backwards...
Page 221: Marker Trace
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Remote Complex Spectrum: Command :CALCulate:SPECtrum:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:REFerence <integer> :CALCulate:SPECtrum:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:REFerence? Streaming: :CALCulate:STReaming:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:REFerence <integer> :CALCulate:STReaming:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:REFerence? :CALC:SPEC:MARK6:REF 8 Example :CALC:SPEC:MARK:REF? Notes Causes the marker specified with the subopcode to become selected Range (for SCPI command): 1 to 12. If the range is exceeded the value is clipped A marker cannot be relative to itself so that choice is not available, and if sent from SCPI generates error -221: “Settings conflict;...
Page 222: Marker Settings Diagram
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement :CALCulate:SPECtrum:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:TRACe SPECtrum | ASPectrum | I | Q | IQ Command :CALCulate:SPECtrum:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:TRACe? Streaming: :CALCulate:STReaming:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:TRACe SPECtrum | ASPectrum | I | Q | IQ :CALCulate:STReaming:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:TRACe? :CALC:SPEC:MARK:TRAC SPEC Example :CALC:SPEC:MARK:TRAC? Notes A marker may be placed on a blanked and/or inactive trace, even though the trace is not visible and/or updating An application may register a trace name to be displayed on the control instead of a trace number Couplings...
Page 223: Marker Function
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Returns 9.91E+37 if marker inactive or on the IQ trace State Saved 9.91E+37 9.91E+37 3.1.7.6 Marker Function The controls on this tab allow you to control the Marker Functions of the instrument. Marker Functions perform post-processing operations on marker data.
Page 224: Band Span
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Band Span Lets you set the width of the span for the selected marker. Remote Complex Spectrum: Command :CALCulate:SPECtrum:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:FUNCtion:BAND:SPAN <freq> :CALCulate:SPECtrum:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:FUNCtion:BAND:SPAN? Streaming: :CALCulate:STReaming:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:FUNCtion:BAND:SPAN <freq> :CALCulate:STReaming:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:FUNCtion:BAND:SPAN? :CALC:SPEC:MARK12:FUNC:BAND:SPAN 20MHz Example :CALC:SPEC:MARK12:FUNC:BAND:SPAN? Couplings Changing Band Span necessarily changes "Band Left"...
Page 225: Band Right
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Band Right Lets you set the right edge frequency for the band of the selected marker. Remote Complex Spectrum: Command :CALCulate:SPECtrum:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:FUNCtion:BAND:RIGHt <freq> :CALCulate:SPECtrum:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:FUNCtion:BAND:RIGHt? Streaming: :CALCulate:STReaming:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:FUNCtion:BAND:RIGHt <freq> :CALCulate:STReaming:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:FUNCtion:BAND:RIGHt? :CALC:SPEC:MARK12:FUNC:BAND:RIGH 20GHz Example :CALC:SPEC:MARK12:FUNC:BAND:RIGH? Couplings Changing Band Right necessarily changes "Band Left"...
Page 226: Mkr->Cf
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Mkr->CF Lets you set the instrument Center Frequency to the frequency of the selected marker. The marker stays at this frequency, so it moves to the center of the display. DELTa marker mode, this function sets the center frequency to the X-Axis value of the delta marker.
Page 227: Meas Setup
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement 3.1.8 Meas Setup Contains functions for setting up the measurement parameters and for setting up parameters global to all measurements in the Mode. 3.1.8.1 Settings Contains frequently used Meas Setup functions to which you will want the fastest access.
Page 228: Average Mode
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement :SPEC:AVER 0 Example :SPEC:AVER? Preset State Saved ON|OFF Range Average Mode Lets you select the type of termination control used for the averaging function. This determines the averaging action after the specified number of sweeps (average count) is reached.
Page 229: Time Avg Num
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Option Parameter Behavior SCALar Voltage Avg The voltage is averaged MAXimum Maximum The maximum values are retained MINimum Minimum The minimum values are retained Remote Complex Spectrum: Command [:SENSe]:SPECtrum:AVERage:TYPE RMS | LOG | SCALar | MAXimum | MINimum [:SENSe]:SPECtrum:AVERage:TYPE? Streaming: [:SENSe]:STReaming:AVERage:TYPE RMS | LOG | SCALar | MAXimum | MINimum...
Page 230 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement HW Averaging Changes the number of time averages to be made using hardware. This averaging is much faster than the standard averaging done in software. The hardware averaging is done on the complex voltage time trace data before any measurement application averaging is done.
Page 231: Auto Couple
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Preset State Saved Saved in state 65535 Auto Couple Immediately puts all Auto/Man functions into Auto. Auto Couple is confined to the current measurement only. It does not affect other measurements in the Mode. In the Auto state, Auto/Man functions are said to be “coupled”, meaning their values change as you make changes to other values in the measurement.
Page 232 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Each parameter, upon being set to Auto, selects and sets the appropriate auto- coupled value based on that parameter’s coupling rules. The Dependency Resolver orchestrates the couplings for parameters that depend on one or more other parameters.
Page 233: Meas Preset
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Meas Preset Returns the Meas Local variables to their preset values. This is the same as sending :CONF:SPEC. in the "Complex Spectrum Measurement" on page 143, or :CONF:STR in the "Streaming Measurement" on page 412.
Page 234: Filter
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Option B2X 255 MHz path 300 MHz Option B5X 510 MHz path 300 MHz Option R10 1 GHz path 1.2 GHz Option R15 1.5 GHz path 1.875 GHz Option R20 2 GHz path 2.4 GHz Option R40 4 GHz path 5.0 GHz...
Page 235 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Selection is set to 25 MHz with IF Path Auto set OFF, the maximum bandwidth value will be clipped to 25 MHz. Remote Command Complex Spectrum: [:SENSe]:SPECtrum:DIF:BANDwidth <freq> [:SENSe]:SPECtrum:DIF:BANDwidth? Streaming: [:SENSe]:STReaming:DIF:BANDwidth <freq> [:SENSe]:STReaming:DIF:BANDwidth? :SPEC:DIF:BAND 1MHz Example...
Page 236 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Auto Function Remote Complex Spectrum: Command [:SENSe]:SPECtrum:DIF:BANDwidth:AUTO ON | OFF | 1 | 0 [:SENSe]:SPECtrum:DIF:BANDwidth:AUTO? Streaming: [:SENSe]:STReaming:DIF:BANDwidth:AUTO ON | OFF | 1 | 0 [:SENSe]:STReaming:DIF:BANDwidth:AUTO? :SPEC:DIF:BAND:AUTO 0 Example :SPEC:DIF:BAND:AUTO? Preset State Saved Range Auto | Man Backwards...
Page 237: Filter Type
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Model Input Option Value VXT models M941xA-B4X 400 MHz M9415A/16A M941xA-B8X 800 MHz M941xA-B12 1.2 GHz M941xAU-B8X Upgrade from 400 MHz to 800 MHz M941xAU-B12 Upgrade from 400 MHz to 1.2 GHz M941xAU-BU2 Upgrade from 800 MHz to 1.2 GHz All other models...
Page 238: Filter Bw
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Dependencies GAUSsian FLATtop are available in all DIF configurations. The other filter types are only available when Option DP2, B40, or wider IF Bandwidth option is installed When you select a filter type that is not GAUSsian FLATtop when using Option B40, B85, B1A,...
Page 239: Filter Alpha
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Backwards Not supported in STReaming measurement Compatibility SCPI [:SENSe]:SPECtrum:WBIF:FILTer:BANDwidth|BWIDth Auto Function Remote Complex Spectrum: Command [:SENSe]:SPECtrum:DIF:FILTer:BANDwidth:AUTO ON | OFF | 1 | 0 [:SENSe]:SPECtrum:DIF:FILTer:BANDwidth:AUTO? Streaming: [:SENSe]:STReaming:DIF:FILTer:BANDwidth:AUTO ON | OFF | 1 | 0 [:SENSe]:STReaming:DIF:FILTer:BANDwidth:AUTO? :SPEC:DIF:FILT:BAND:AUTO 0 Example...
Page 240: Filter/Fft Setup Summary Table
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Analog Filter State (Backwards Compatibility only) In PSA, this SCPI manually selects the anti-alias filter that will be used for measurements using the wideband IF path. The analog anti-alias filter is not selectable for DIF40 or WBDIF and this command is a no-op for X-Series.
Page 241: Length Ctrl
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Remote Complex Spectrum: Command [:SENSe]:SPECtrum:FFT:WINDow[:TYPE] FLATtop | UNIForm | HANNing | HAMMing | GAUSsian | BLACkman | BH4Tap | KB70 | KB90 | KB110 [:SENSe]:SPECtrum:FFT:WINDow[:TYPE]? Streaming: [:SENSe]:STReaming:FFT:WINDow[:TYPE] FLATtop | UNIForm | HANNing | HAMMing | GAUSsian | BLACkman | BH4Tap | KB70 | KB90 | KB110 [:SENSe]:STReaming:FFT:WINDow[:TYPE]? :SPEC:FFT:WIND KB90...
Page 242: Fft Length
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement The “points” is the number of points for IQ pairs. For example, if Window Length is set to 10, it means the window length is for 10 I and 10 Q points, not 5 I and 5 Q points.
Page 243: Filter/Fft Setup Summary Table
The External path selection is only shown when Option EDC is installed. It is grayed- out unless a valid Keysight oscilloscope is connected as an external digitizer. Connecting an External Digitizer...
Page 244 Connecting an Oscilloscope as an External Digitizer The following oscilloscopes are supported: – Keysight S-Series DSOS804A – Keysight S-Series with DSOS8GBW (8 GHz bandwidth upgrade) – Keysight S-Series with DSOV134A To connect one of these oscilloscopes for External Digitizer Control (EDC): Connect the input signal to the Input connector of your instrument: –...
Page 245 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Use only connectors with the symbol as shown above. When a valid USB3 connection is established, the instrument displays the message “Updating Hardware Configuration”. When this connection is to a supported oscilloscope, the instrument displays the message “External Oscilloscope connected.”...
Page 246 Connecting an M8131A as an External Digitizer The M8131A Digitizer is a 2-slot module that plugs into a Keysight AXIe chassis (M9502A or M9505A). In order to connect the Digitizer, the instrument must connect to the PCIe or USB3 port of the AXIe chassis. USB3 connection is slower, but easier to use, and is the only option for N9041B.
Page 247 Make sure latest version of M8131A SFP is installed on Signal Analyzer (available at Keysight.com) Connect the input signal to the Input connector of your instrument: – For N9041B, input signal must be connected to RF Input 2 as shown below –...
Page 248 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement When reducing the Digital IF Bandwidth, the selected IF Path is the narrowest possible path applicable. For example, an instrument with B25, B40 and B1X installed, and you currently have IF Path Auto set to and the Digital IF Bandwidth is 50 MHz, the IF Path selection will be 140 MHz .
Page 249 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Notes Option Path B10M 10 MHz B25M 25 MHz B40M 40 MHz B85M 85 MHz B125M 125 MHz B140M 140 MHz B160M 160 MHz B255M 255 MHz B510M 510 MHz 1 GHz 1.5 GHz 2 GHz 4 GHz...
Page 250: Apply Edc Preset
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement SCPI selection is disabled. When the B125M SCPI is selected in this case, the instrument generates error -221, “Settings Conflict; Use wider bandwidth selection” In cases where the path is not available but is selected from SCPI, generates error -241,”Hardware missing;...
Page 251: Advanced
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Only appears and is enabled when the External"IF Path" on page 376 is selected. When pressed, several parameters are set to values necessary to make a proper EDC measurement: 1. Input = RF 2.
Page 252 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Dependencies Does not appear in all models. The key is blank in those models, but the SCPI command is accepted for compatibility (although no action is taken) Preset Because this function is in Auto after preset, and because Span after preset > 314.16 kHz (see Auto rules, next section) the state of this function after Preset will be 2 State Saved Range...
Page 253 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Option Description – In instruments without EP0, this setting is accepted but no action is taken – In instruments with EP0, emphasizes spur avoidance over close-in "Best Spurs" on page 254 phase noise performance –...
Page 254 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement is reconfigured in a way that allows the phase noise to increase by 7 dB mostly within ±1 octave around 400 kHz offset. The spurs will always be below −70 dBc. Best Spurs :FREQ:SYNT 5 In instruments with EP0, the LO is configured for better phase noise than the...
Page 255 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement In instruments with Option EP0, this is the same configuration as "Best Spurs" on page 254. It is available with the "Fast Tuning" on page 254 label for convenience, and to make the user interface more consistent with other X-Series instrument family members.
Page 256 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Models with Option Conditions Selection loop bandwidth for the fast-tuning choice, which is a compromise Span > 22 MHz, or "Fast Tuning" on between tuning speed and phase page 254 RBW > 400 kHz, or noise, giving good tuning speed at all CF ≤...
Page 257: Adc Dither
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Ranges Option Option # Phase Noise Option Range No EPx Option Best Close-in [offset < 20 kHz] Best Wide-offset [offset > 30 kHz] Fast Tuning [same as Best Close-In] Best Close-in [offset <...
Page 258 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement The increased noise due to turning dither on is most significant in low band (0 to 3.6 GHz) with IF Gain set to Low, where it can be about 0.2 dB. "More Information"...
Page 259: Lo Dither
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Auto Sets the ADC dither to automatic. The instrument then chooses the dither level according to which is most likely to be the best selection, based on other settings within the digital IF. When in AUTO, the instrument sets the dither to according to the rules below: whenever the effective IF Gain is Low and the Digital IF BW is less than or equal to 8...
Page 260: If Gain
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement other case, an error message is generated, -241,"Hardware missing; Option H1G required" Only appears in some Modes (for example, VMA and IQ Analyzer) LO Dither is turned and grayed-out when IF Path is set to a path other than 1 GHz. If you press the grayed-out control, a warning message “LO Dither only available with IF Path 1 GHz”...
Page 261 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement [:SENSe]:STReaming:IF:GAIN[:STATe]? :SPEC:IF:GAIN LOW Example :SPEC:IF:GAIN? As with most parameters that have an Auto state, Auto Couple sets this function to AUTOrange, which Couplings then selects or HIGH, depending on the IF Path. Setting any specific value (AUTOrange, LOW, HIGH or OTHer) sets the Auto state to Preset...
Page 262: If Gain Offset
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement :SPEC:IF:GAIN AUTOrange Example Low Gain (Best for Large Signals) Forces IF Gain to LOW. :SPEC:IF:GAIN LOW Example High Gain (Best Noise Level) Forces IF Gain to HIGH. :SPEC:IF:GAIN HIGH Example IF Gain Offset Sets the IF Gain Offset for the 40 MHz, 140 MHz, 160 MHz ...
Page 263: Other If Gain
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Example Set IF Gain Offset to 2: :SPEC:IF:GAIN:OFFS 2 Dependencies When the "IF Gain" on page 260 State is set to OTHer, the "Other IF Gain" on page 263 value is used, and the IF Gain Offset value is ignored Preset State Saved...
Page 264 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Example When testing a 5G signal with all 8 channels where each channel is 100 MHz wide, there may be cases where images from adjacent channels are visible. To measure the highest frequency carrier, you need to switch to ALTernate side mixing to avoid the 8th carrier from aliasing on top of other carriers.
Page 265: Power Reference Plane
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement [:SENSe]:SPECtrum:LO:MIXMode? Streaming: [:SENSe]:STReaming:LO:MIXMode NORMal | ALTernate [:SENSe]:STReaming:LO:MIXMode? :SPEC:LO:MIXM NORM Example :SPEC:LO:MIXM? Dependencies Grayed-out when the RF Input is set to something other than RF (such as External Mixer). If you press the grayed-out control, a warning message “Feature only available with Signal Input RF”...
Page 266: Mixing Mode State (Remote Command Only)
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Remote Command For valid <meas> values, see "Valid Measurement Keywords" on page 266 [:SENSe]:<meas>:POWer:IQ:REFerence:PLANe RF | BASeband [:SENSe]:<meas>:POWer:IQ:REFerence:PLANe? Example (Complex Spectrum measurement) SPEC:POW:IQ:REF:PLAN BAS SPEC:POW:IQ:REF:PLAN? Dependencies Only available if the I/Q input exists Enabled only when the input is I/Q and I/Q Path is I+jQ Disabled for all other conditions Preset...
Page 267: Invert Spectrum
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Lets you alternate between mixing modes for the Local Oscillator (LO). The default setting is NORMal LO mixing mode, which is determined by the instrument configuration to be either “high side” or “low side”. The query returns “High” or “Low”...
Page 268: Sweep
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement :WAV:IF:FREQ? Couplings A change in Span, Digital IF BW or IF Path parameters can result in a change of the IF Frequency value 3.1.9 Sweep Accesses controls to configure and control the acquisition of data, and the X-axis parameters of the instrument.
Page 269 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement SWEEPING bit is set MEASURING bit is set Backwards For Spectrum Analysis Mode in ESA and PSA, the Restart hardkey and the :INIT:REST command Compatibility restarted trace averages (displayed average count reset to 1) for a trace in Clear Write, but did not Notes restart Max Hold and Min Hold In X-Series, the Restart hardkey and the...
Page 270 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Trace Update The numeric results are not blanked at any time during the restart cycle. For slow sweeps (see Trace Update section in Trace/Detector), the traces are updated real-time during the sweep. There may be a special circumstance in application mode measurements where an exception is made and the traces and/or results need to be blanked before displaying the new results.
Page 271: Pause/Resume
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Pause/Resume Pauses a measurement after the current data acquisition is complete. When paused, the label on the control changes to Resume. Pressing Resume un- pauses the measurement. When paused, pressing Restart performs a Resume. :INITiate:PAUSe Remote Command :INITiate:RESume...
Page 272: Sweep/Measure
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement 3.1.9.2 Sweep/Measure Lets you toggle between Continuous and Single sweep or measurement operation. The single/continuous state is Meas Global, so the setting affects all measurements. The front-panel key Single/Cont performs exactly the same function "More Information"...
Page 273: Restart
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Single Mode The instrument takes a single sweep when in Single mode, or if in average or Max/Min Hold, or if there is a Waterfall window displayed, it takes multiple sweeps until the average/hold count reaches the Average/Hold Num, then the count stops incrementing, and the instrument stops sweeping See the Trace key description under Trace Average for the averaging formula used.
Page 274 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement – Pressing the Restart key – Sending :INIT:IMM – Sending :INIT:REST "More Information" on page 274 :INITiate[:IMMediate] Remote Command :INITiate:RESTart :INIT:IMM Example :INIT:REST :INIT:REST :INIT:IMM Notes perform exactly the same function Couplings Resets average/hold count k.
Page 275 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement – Restarts the current sweep – Restarts the current measurement – Restarts the current set of sweeps if any trace is in Trace Average, Max Hold or Min Hold – Restarts the current set of measurements if Averaging, or Max Hold, or Min Hold is on for the measurement If there is no Average or Max/Min Hold function (no trace in Trace Average or Hold, or Average/Hold Num set to 1), and no Waterfall window is being displayed, a single...
Page 276: Pause/Resume
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement Sweep and Trigger Reset Resetting the sweep system resets the average/hold count k to 0. It also resets the set point counter to 0. Resetting the trigger system resets the internal auto trig timer to the value set by the Auto Trig control.
Page 277: Scale
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement If the instrument is set for Continuous measurement, it sets up the measurement and initiates a new data measurement sequence with a new data acquisition (sweep) taken once the trigger condition is met. If the instrument is set for Single measurement, it remains in the "idle"...
Page 278: Scale/Div
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state Min/Max -10.0 s / 10.0s Annotation <value> s bottom left of graph Scale/Div Lets you set the display X scale/division value. Only appears if the IQ Waveform window is selected.
Page 279: Auto Scaling
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement :DISP:SPEC:VIEW:WIND2:TRAC:X:RPOS LEFT Example :DISP:SPEC:VIEW:WIND2:TRAC:X:RPOS? LEFT Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state LEFT|CENTer|RIGHt Range Auto Scaling Lets you toggle the scale coupling function between and OFF. Only appears if the IQ Waveform window is selected. Remote Complex Spectrum: Command...
Page 280: Record Points
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement [:SENSe]:<meas>:RECord:TIME <time> Remote Command [:SENSe]:<meas>:RECord:TIME? For <meas>, substitute SPECtrum WAVeform :SPEC:REC:TIME 4 ms Example :SPEC:REC:TIME? Dependencies In general, Record Time is prioritized over "Record Points" on page 409. However, if the Record Points is changed directly, then Record Time is updated Preset State Saved...
Page 281: Record
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement – Sample Rate Record Records the data with the current measurement settings for the duration specified using the "Record Time" on page 409 "Record Points" on page 409 parameters. STReaming Not available in the measurement.
Page 282: Trace
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.1 Complex Spectrum Measurement “MyData_0001.binf” “MyData_0002.binf” and so on. Not available in the STReaming measurement. 3.1.10 Trace Lets you control the display and storage of trace data for the available traces. 3.1.10.1 Settings Lets you configure and execute Normalize functions to display one trace relative to a reference trace.
Page 283: Iq Waveform Measurement
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement The IQ Waveform measurement is a time-domain measurement that lets you view the envelope, real and imaginary components of an RF or baseband signal. It is similar in many respects to the zero-span measurement in traditional spectrum analysis but gives you direct access to the I/Q pairs of the signal, such as those that make up modern communications signals.
Page 284 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Remote Command Results For the :FETCh, :MEASure :READ queries above, the results returned depend on the parameter value as follows: Results Returned Returns unprocessed I/Q trace data, as a series of trace point pairs, in Volts Each pair consists of an I value (even-indexed, starting at 0), followed by a Q value (odd-indexed) Returns the following scalar results: Item...
Page 285: Views
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Results Returned point less than index 0 Returns conjugated I/Q trace data, in Volts, if "Invert Spectrum" on page 397 is set to INVert. Otherwise, returns the same unprocessed I/Q trace data as n = 0 above 3.2.1 Views You can select the measurement view you want to use from the Mode/Measurement/View selector screen.
Page 286: I/Q Waveform
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Shows an RF envelope (magnitude) window and a metrics table showing the measured values for the mean power and peak-to-mean power. 3.2.1.2 I/Q Waveform Windows: "I/Q Waveform" on page 287 Shows a window with I and Q voltages vs time. SCPI commands can also be used to query the I/Q pairs while in this View.
Page 287: Metrics
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement 3.2.2.2 Metrics Shows the measured values for the mean power and peak-to-mean power of the RF Envelope result of the waveform (time domain) measurements. Numeric Results Name Type Description Unit Format Mean Pwr Float64 The mean power (dBm).
Page 288: Amplitude
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement 3.2.3 Amplitude Activates the Amplitude menu and selects Reference Level or Reference Value as the active function, depending on the measurement. Some features in this menu apply to multiple measurements. Some other features apply only to specific measurements and their controls are blanked or grayed-out in measurements that do not support the feature.
Page 289: Scale/Div
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement RF Envelope :DISPlay:WAVeform:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel <amptd> Remote Command :DISPlay:WAVeform:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RLEVel? :DISP:WAV:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:Y:RLEV -50 dBm Example Couplings When "Auto Scaling" on page 292 (default), this value is automatically determined by the measurement result. When you set a value manually, Auto Scaling changes to Preset 10.00 dBm State Saved...
Page 290: Scale Range
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement :DISPlay:WAVeform:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:PDIVision? Command :DISP:WAV:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:Y:PDIV 5 Example :DISP:WAV:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:Y:PDIV? Couplings Coupled to "Scale Range" on page 290 as follows Scale/Div = Scale Range/10 (number of divisions) When "Auto Scaling" on page 292 is On, this value is automatically determined by the measurement result When you change a value, Auto Scaling automatically changes to Off Preset...
Page 291: Ref Position
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement RF Envelope :DISPlay:WAVeform:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RANGe <rel_ampl> Remote Command :DISPlay:WAVeform:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RANGe? :DISP:WAV:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:Y:RANG 100 Example :DISP:WAV:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:Y:RANG? Couplings Coupled to "Scale/Div" on page 289 as follows Scale Range = Scale/Div * 10 (number of divisions) When you change a value, "Auto Scaling"...
Page 292: Auto Scaling
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement RF Envelope :DISPlay:WAVeform:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition TOP | CENTer | Remote BOTTom Command :DISPlay:WAVeform:VIEW[1]:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition? :DISP:WAV:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:Y:RPOS CENT Example :DISP:WAV:VIEW:WIND:TRAC:Y:RPOS? Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Top|Center|Bottom Range Annotation > and < are displayed both side of graph to indicate Reference Position IQ Waveform :DISPlay:WAVeform:VIEW2:WINDow[1]:TRACe:Y[:SCALe]:RPOSition TOP | CENTer | Remote...
Page 293: Attenuation
Meas Preset. Only available when the hardware set includes an input attenuator, which is typically only the case for Keysight’s benchtop instruments. For example, this tab does not appear in VXT models M9420A/10A/11A/15A/16A, M9410E/11E/15E/16E, nor in UXM. In UXM, all Attenuation and Range settings are disabled, as the expected input power level is handled by the Call Processing App that drives the DUT power control.
Page 294 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Configuration 2: Mechanical attenuator, no optional electronic attenuator Note that Configuration 2 is not strictly speaking a dual-section attenuator, since there is no electronic section available. However, it behaves exactly like Configuration 1 without the Electronic Attenuator Option EA3, therefore for the sake of this document it is grouped into the “Dual-Attenuator”...
Page 295: Full Range Atten
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement When you have the Dual-Attenuator configuration, you may still have only a Single- Attenuator, because unless Option EA3 (the Electronic Attenuator option) is available, and you purchase it, you will have only the mechanical attenuator. Full Range Atten This control and Attenuator Summary only appear in N9041B, when the RF input is selected, the RF Input Port is set to RF Input 2, and the Full Range Attenuator is...
Page 296: Mech Atten
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement – Total Atten below 50 GHz: 30 dB – Total Atten above 50 GHz: 20 dB Mech Atten Labeled Mech Atten in Dual-Attenuator models, and Atten in Single-Attenuator models. In the Dual-Attenuator configuration, this control only affects the mechanical attenuator.
Page 297 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement attenuator hardware setting until the input is changed back to the RF Input For CXA-m with Option FSA (Fine-Step Attenuator or 2 dB steps), the FSA-like behavior is only available when the frequency setting is <= 7.5 GHz. So, when the frequency is changed from below 7.5 GHz to above 7.5 GHz, the attenuation setting changes to a multiple of 10 dB that is no smaller than the previous setting.
Page 298 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Dependencies :POW:ATT:AUTO is only available in measurements that support Auto, such as Swept SA Preset Attenuator Configurations and Auto/Man As described under "Attenuation" on page 293, there are two distinct attenuator configurations available in the X-Series, the Single Attenuator and Dual-Attenuator configurations.
Page 299: Elec Atten
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Elec Atten Controls the Electronic Attenuator in Dual-Attenuator configurations. Does not appear in Single-Attenuator configurations, because the control of both the mechanical and electronic stages of the Single-Attenuator is integrated into the single Atten control.
Page 300 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement – Power vs. Time and Transmit Power measurement in GSM/EDGE Mode – Burst Power measurement in Spectrum Analyzer Mode The SCPI-only “soft” electronic attenuation for the single-attenuator configuration is not available in all measurements;...
Page 301 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement aid in remote operation and are negligible for front panel use. See "Using the Electronic Attenuator: Pros and Cons" on page 302 for a detailed discussion of the pros and cons of using the electronic attenuator. For the Single-Attenuator configuration, for SCPI backwards compatibility, the “soft”...
Page 302: Adjust Atten For Min Clipping
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement – The Elec Atten control is grayed out – The Auto/Man state of (Mech) Atten is restored – If now in Auto, (Mech) Atten recouples – If now in Man, (Mech) Atten is set to the value of total attenuation that existed before the Elec Atten was disabled.
Page 303: Adjust Atten
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize IMMediate Remote Command :POW:RANG:OPT IMM Example Notes Executing Adjust Atten for Min Clipping initiates the measurement Dependencies Does not appear in the Swept SA, RTSA, Monitor Spectrum and Complex Spectrum measurements Appears in the Waveform measurement in BASIC and 5G NR Modes Adjust Atten Allows you to select;...
Page 304 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Selection SCPI Note ELECtrical Elec Atten Only Selects only the electric attenuator to participate in auto ranging. This offers less wear on the mechanical attenuator and is usually faster COMBined Elec+Mech In Dual-Attenuator models, this selects both attenuators to Atten participate in the autoranging...
Page 305 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Single-Attenuator Models Dual-Attenuator models "Adjust Atten for Min Clipping" on page 302 "Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping" on page selection is Mech + Elec Atten: IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 306 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 307: Mech Atten Step
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement "Pre-Adjust for Min Clipping" on page 303 selection is Elec Only. Note that the Mech Atten value is not adjusted, and the value previously set is used. Therefore, there is a case that IF Overload is still observed depending on the input signal level and the Mech Atten setting.
Page 308: Range (Baseband Input Models)
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:ATTenuation:STEP[:INCRement]? :POW:ATT:STEP 2 Example :POW:ATT:STEP? Notes Has a toggle control on the front panel, but takes a specific value (in dB) when used remotely. The only valid values are 2 and 10 Dependencies Blanked in EXA, CXA and CXA-m if option FSA (2 dB steps) is not present.
Page 309: I Range
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Not all measurements support Range Auto/Man. If Auto is not supported in the current measurement, this control is grayed-out, displaying Man, and returned to a SCPI query, but this does not change the Auto/Man setting for Range. When you switch to a measurement that supports Auto, it goes back to Auto if it was previously in Auto mode.
Page 310 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement :VOLT:IQ:RANG? Notes The numeric entries are mapped to the smallest gain range whose break point is greater than or equal to the value, or 1 V Peak if the value is greater than 1 V Couplings When "Q Same as I"...
Page 311: Q Range
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Q Range The internal gain range for the Q channel. Q Range only applies to Input Path Q Only and Ind I/Q. For input I+jQ "I Range" on page 309 determines both I and Q channel range settings.
Page 312: Q Same As I
"Q Range" on page 311 Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state OFF|ON Range 3.2.3.4 Range (Non-attenuator models) Only available for Keysight’s modular signal analyzers and certain other Keysight products, such as VXT and M941xE. State Saved IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 313: Range
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Range Represents the amplitude of the largest sinusoidal signal that could be present within the IF without being clipped by the ADC. For signals with high peak-to- average ratios, the range may need to exceed the rms signal power by a significant amount to avoid clipping.
Page 314: Peak-To-Average Ratio
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RANGe:OPTimize:ATTenuation? Notes Because there is no attenuator control available in these models, the control displays only choices. However, for SCPI compatibility with other platforms, all three parameters (ELECtrical, COMBined, and ON) are honored and all are mapped to ELECtrical, so if any of these three parameters is sent, a subsequent query will return ELEC Dependencies...
Page 315: Mixer Lvl Offset
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement via SCPI, but is not changeable. In such applications the control is grayed-out. Attempts to change the value via SCPI are ignored, but no error message is generated Dependencies Does not appear in Spectrum Analyzer Mode Preset VXT Models M9410A/11A 0 dB...
Page 316: Presel Center
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement This tab does appear in VXT Models M9410A/11A/15A/16A and M9410E/11E/15E/16E, because "Software Preselection" on page 330 is under this tab, and VXT Models M9410A/11A/15A/16A and M9410E/11E/15E/16E implement a version of Software Preselection. Presel Center Adjusts the centering of the preselector filter to optimize the amplitude accuracy at the frequency of the selected marker.
Page 317: Preselector Adjust
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement dependencies subsequent measurement has completed, nor are results returned in response to :READ :MEASure queries Measuring bit remains set (true) while this command is operating, and does not go false until the subsequent sweep/measurement has completed Proper Preselector Operation Certain considerations should be observed to ensure proper operation:...
Page 318: Internal Preamp
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement – Does not appear in VXT Models M9410A/11A/15A/16A – Does not appear in M9410E/11E/15E/16E – Grayed-out if microwave preselector is off – Grayed-out if entirely in Band 0, that is, if Stop Freq is lower than about 3.6 GHz –...
Page 319 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Selection Example Note :POW:GAIN OFF Low Band :POW:GAIN ON Sets the internal preamp to use only the low band. The frequency range of the installed (optional) low-band :POW:GAIN:BAND preamp is displayed in square brackets on the Low Band selection in the dropdown Full Range :POW:GAIN ON...
Page 320: Lna
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement When the USB Preamp is connected to USB, the Preamp annotation says “Preamp: USB” if the internal preamp is off or “Preamp: USB, Int” if the internal preamp is on (only for measurements that support the USB preamp) Auto Function [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:GAIN[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1...
Page 321: Μw Path Control
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement More Information When LNA is installed, the preamp annotation changes to show the state of both LNA and Internal Preamp. Below is an example: Note that when operating entirely in the low band (below about 3.6 GHz), if LNA is on, Internal Preamp is switched off (even if you have its switch set to ON).
Page 322 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement without giving the best possible noise floor. The preamp, if purchased and used, gives better noise floor than does Low Noise Path Enable, but the preamp’s compression threshold and third-order intercept are much poorer than that of Low Noise Path Enable.
Page 323 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement In any of these cases, if the required options are not present and the SCPI command is sent, error - 241, "Hardware missing; Option not installed" is generated Low Noise Path Enable and Full Bypass Enable are grayed-out if the current measurement does not support them Low Noise Path Enable and Full Bypass Enable are not supported in Avionics and MMR Modes (non- modulation measurements).
Page 324 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement This allows the function to automatically switch based on certain Auto Rules as shown below: VMA Mode Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Digital Demod Use Standard Path unless tuned frequency > 3.6 GHz and IFBW > 15 MHz, in which case choose Preselector Bypass Monitor Spectrum Always Presel Bypass...
Page 325 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Measurement µW Path Control Auto behavior Modulation Use Standard Path unless tuned frequency > 3.6 GHz and IFBW > 15 MHz, in Analysis which case choose Full Bypass if conditions warrant(FBP Option is available and “Allow Full Bypass in Auto”...
Page 326 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Low Noise Path Enable Low Noise Path Enable provides a lower noise floor under some circumstances, particularly when operating in the 21–26.5 GHz region. With the Low Noise Path enabled, the low band/high band switch and microwave preamp are bypassed whenever all the following are true: –...
Page 327 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement range of the preamp path is too little and the noise floor of the standard path is too high, the Low Noise Path can provide the best dynamic range The graph below illustrates the concept. It shows, in red, the performance of an instrument at different attenuation settings, both with the preamp on and off, in a measurement that is affected by both instrument noise and instrument TOI.
Page 328 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement µW Preselector Bypass Toggles the preselector bypass switch for band 1 and higher. When the microwave presel is on, the signal path is preselected. When the microwave preselector is off, the signal path is not preselected. The preselected path is the normal path for the instrument.
Page 329 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement interface. Also, if the preamp is turned on, the Low Noise Path is not used, whether or not the Full Bypass Enable is selected in the user interface. The only time the Low Noise Path is used is when Full Bypass Enable is selected, the sweep is completely in High Band (>...
Page 330: Software Preselection
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Preselector and Bandwidth Conflict When the Frequency Extender Preselector is applied and the signal bandwidth is greater than 2.5 [GHz], then a settings alert message will show to warn the user that the signal may be distorted due to the limitation of the Frequency Extender Preselector bandwidth.
Page 331 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement N9042B+V3050A Software Preselection compensates for the frequency range limit of the microwave preselector. Since the microwave preselector only goes up to 50 GHz, software preselection must be used to suppress and separate images above 50 GHz. The specific algorithm used for software preselection is specified by the SW Preselection Type selection –...
Page 332: Sw Preselection Type
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Preset N9041B N9042B+V3050A M9410A/11A State Saved Saved in instrument state SW Preselection Type Specifies the algorithm used for software preselection. Two hidden sweeps occur in succession. The second sweep is offset in LO frequency by 2 * IF / N.
Page 333: Sw Preselection Bw
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement SW Preselection BW Specifies the effective bandwidth to be used for Software Preselection. The options are: – NORMal – when making Swept measurements, a software preselection algorithm is used which takes up to 4 background acquisitions, then post-processes the result.
Page 334 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement and 6000 MHz. The Prefilter provides the necessary rejection of the unwanted signal. [:SENSe]:<measurement>:PFILter[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command [:SENSe]:<measurement>:PFILter[:STATe]? Example Enable High Freq Prefilter for the Complex Spectrum Measurement in BASIC Mode: :SPEC:PFIL ON...
Page 335: Settings
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement 3.2.4 BW Opens the BW (Bandwidth) menu. The Digital IF BW functions control filter bandwidth and filter type. There are two filter types: Gaussian and Flattop. The Gaussian filters have a response curve that is parabolic on a log scale. The Flattop filter shape is a close approximation of a rectangular filter.
Page 336 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state All others: 10 Hz Input Option Value None 10 MHz 25 MHz 40 MHz 85.0 MHz 125.0 MHz 140 MHz 160 MHz 255 MHz 510 MHz 1 GHz 1.5 GHz 2 GHz...
Page 337: Filter Type
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement – [:SENSe]:WAVeform:BANDwidth[:RESolution] Backwards Compatibility SCPI [:SENSe]:WAVeform:BWIDth[:RESolution] Auto Function [:SENSe]:WAVeform:DIF:BANDwidth:AUTO ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command [:SENSe]:WAVeform:DIF:BANDwidth:AUTO? :WAV:DIF:BAND:AUTO 0 Example :WAV:DIF:BAND:AUTO? Preset Preset Values Mode Option Radio Std Value GSM/EDGE 510 kHz LTE, LTETDD, LTEAFDD,...
Page 338 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Type SCPI Notes SNYQuist Short Nyquist Available only when Option B40, B85, B1A, or B1X WBDIF installed RSNYquist Raised Short Nyquist RCOSine Raised Cosine RRCosine Root Raised Cosine [:SENSe]:WAVeform:DIF:FILTer:TYPE GAUSsian | FLATtop Remote Command [:SENSe]:WAVeform:DIF:FILTer:TYPE? With DIF40 and/or WBDIF:...
Page 339: Filter Bw
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Gaussian When Option DP2, B40, or wider IF Bandwidth option is installed, the capability for arbitrary Digital IF bandwidths is available. However, for instruments without DP2, B40, or wider IF Bandwidth option , the selectable Gaussian filter bandwidths are predetermined.
Page 340: Filter Alpha
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Filter Alpha Sets the filter alpha for the DIF filter. This feature is only available when Option DP2, B40, or wider IF Bandwidth option is installed. [:SENSe]:WAVeform:DIF:FILTer:ALPHa <real> Remote Command [:SENSe]:WAVeform:DIF:FILTer:ALPHa? :WAV:DIF:FILT:ALPH 0.5 Example :WAV:DIF:FILT:ALPH?
Page 341: View
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement View "Views" on page 285. User View Lets you choose a View from the saved User Views for the current measurement. This panel only appears if a User View exists for the current measurement. :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:SELect <alphanumeric>...
Page 342: Save Layout As New View
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement be able to return easily to your original Basic View, you can save your edited View as a “User View”. Save Layout as New View Saves your new View as a User View. An alpha keyboard appears, which lets you name your new View;...
Page 343: Delete User View
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement rename a Predefined View” is generated If the display is disabled (via :DISP:ENAB OFF) then the error message “-221, Settings conflict; View SCPI cannot be used while Display is disabled” is generated Delete User View You can delete the current View if it is a User View.
Page 344: View Listing Query
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement View Listing Query Returns a string containing a comma-separated list of names for all the Views, including User Views, available for the current Measurement. :DISPlay:VIEW:ADVanced:CATalog? Remote Command :DISP:VIEW:ADV:CAT? Example Notes Returns a quoted string of the available Views for the current measurement, separated by commas. The list includes names for all the Views, including User Views, available for the current Measurement Example: "Normal,Trace Zoom,Spectrogram,Baseband,myView1,yourView1"...
Page 345: Screen Annotation
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement :DISPlay:GRATicule[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :DISPlay:GRATicule[:STATe]? :DISP:GRAT OFF Example Notes The graticule is the set of horizontal and vertical lines that make up the grid/divisions for the X-Axis and Y-Axis Preset State Saved...
Page 346: Control Annotation
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement displayed on the graph. If the length of the comment is greater than 20 characters, the first 8 characters and the last 8 characters are displayed, joined with …. :DISPlay:ANNotation:TRACe[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :DISPlay:ANNotation:TRACe[:STATe]? :DISP:ANN:TRAC OFF...
Page 347 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Theare three reasons for turning the display off: 1. To increase speed as much as possible by freeing the instrument from having to update the display 2. To reduce emissions from the display, drive circuitry 3.
Page 348: Frequency
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Preset :SYST:DEF MISC, but not affected by *RST :SYSTem:PRESet Set by State Saved Not saved in instrument state :SYST:PRES :DISPlay:ENABle Backwards no longer turns on as it did in legacy analyzers Compatibility Notes 3.2.6 Frequency...
Page 349 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement For more details, see the following: – "RF Center Freq (Remote Command Only)" on page 352 – "Ext Mix Center Freq (Remote Command Only)" on page 353 – "I/Q Center Freq (Remote Command Only)" on page 353 –...
Page 350 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement [:SENSe]:FREQuency:CENTer:AUTO? :FREQ:CENT:AUTO OFF Example :FREQ:CENT:AUTO? Dependencies Only available for Monitor Spectrum, Power Stat CCDF and IQ waveform measurements in the MSR, LTE-Advanced FDD/TDD and 5G NR Modes Couplings When Center Frequency is changed, state is automatically changed to Manual Center Frequency, Center Frequency Offset and Carrier Reference Frequency are coupled.
Page 351 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Freq Option CF after Mode Stop Freq after Mode Max Freq (can't tune Preset Preset above) F03 (CXA-m) 1.505 GHz 3.0 GHz 3.08 GHz F07 (CXA-m) 3.755 GHz 7.5 GHz 7.575 GHz F13 (CXA-m) 6.805 GHz 13.6 GHz...
Page 352 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Tracking Min Freq If above this Freq, Stop Freq Max Freq (clips to this freq when turn (can't tune Generator clipped to this Freq when TG TG on and can’t tune below above) Option turned on...
Page 353 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Ext Mix Center Freq (Remote Command Only) Specifies the External Mixer Center Frequency. Sets the Center Frequency to use when the External Mixer is selected, even if the External Mixer input is not the input that is selected at the time the command is sent.
Page 354: Marker
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement [:SENSe]:FREQuency:IQ:CENTer? :FREQ:IQ:CENT: 30 MHz Example Notes This command is the same in all Modes, but the parameter is Measurement Global. So, the value is independent in each Mode and common across all the measurements in the Mode Preset 0 Hz State Saved...
Page 355: Settings
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement 3.2.7.2 Settings The controls on this tab include the Marker active function and a radio button (POSition, DELTa, or OFF) for the selection for "Marker Mode" on page 357 selected marker, as well as additional functions that help you use markers. Marker Time This is the fundamental control that you use to move a marker around on the trace.
Page 356 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Marker X Axis Position (Remote Command Only) Sets the marker X position in trace points. It has no effect if the control mode is OFF, but is the SCPI equivalent of entering a value if the control mode is Normal or Delta. The entered value is immediately translated into the current X Axis Scale units for setting the value of the marker.
Page 357: Marker Mode
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement -2.402406506109E+001 Case #2 - Trace IQ: returns a double array of two values, the first is I, and the second is Q >:CALC:WAV:MARK1:Y? -3.006944493834E-003,+9.9870666467354E-004 The IQ selection is for backwards compatibility purposes. For new designs, use the I and/or Q selection instead You must be in a Mode that includes the Waveform measurement to use this command.
Page 358: Delta Marker (Reset Delta)
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Backwards Compatibility SCPI Command Sets or queries the state of a marker. Setting a marker that is to state or 1 puts it in POSition mode and places it at the center of the screen. Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state...
Page 359: Peak Search
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement :CALC:WAV:MARK:COUP ON Example :CALC:WAV:MARK:COUP? Preset Presets on Mode Preset and "All Markers Off" on page 358 State Saved Saved in instrument state 3.2.7.3 Peak Search The controls on this tab allow you to move the marker to selected peaks of the signal, giving you enormous analysis capabilities, particularly when combined with the Delta marker function.
Page 360: Next Peak
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Next Peak Moves the selected marker to the peak that is next lower in amplitude than the current marker value. If the selected marker was OFF, then it is turned as a POSition marker, and a peak search is performed.
Page 361: Peak Search Range
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Peak Search Range Lets you specify the range of trace to perform peak search actions specified in the Peak Search menu. Option SCPI Behavior FULL Full Peak Search actions will be performed on the entire trace MANual Manual Specifies the range of the trace to which Peak Search actions will...
Page 362: Marker Function
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement as shown below. :CALCulate:WAVeform:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:RANGe:STOP <time> Remote Command :CALCulate:WAVeform:MARKer:PEAK:SEARch:RANGe:STOP? :CALC:WAV:MARK:PEAK:SEAR:RANG:STOP 0.001 Example Dependencies Disabled when Peak Search Range is set to Full. Preset 0.0 ms Min/Max 0.0/+Meas Time 3.2.7.5 Marker Function The controls in this tab perform post-processing operations on marker data. The Marker Function menu controls which marker functions are turned on, and allows you to adjust the setup parameters for each function.
Page 363: Interval Function
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Interval Function Sets the marker control function type to one of: Option Parameter NOISe Marker Noise BPOWer Interval Power BDENsity Interval Density Marker Function Off All interactions and dependencies detailed under the control description are enforced when the remote command is sent.
Page 364: Interval Right
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement :CALCulate:WAVeform:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:FUNCtion:BAND:LEFT <time> Remote Command :CALCulate:WAVeform:MARKer[1]|2|…|12:FUNCtion:BAND:LEFT? :CALC:WAV:MARK12:FUNC:BAND:LEFT 1 s Example :CALC:WAV:MARK12:FUNC:BAND:LEFT? Couplings Changing Interval Left necessarily changes "Interval Span" on page 363 "Interval Right" on page Preset 5% of Meas Time State Saved 100 s Interval Right Sets the right edge time for the band of the selected marker.
Page 365: Marker Trace
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Every marker has another marker to which it is relative. This marker is referred to as the “reference marker” for that marker. This attribute is set by the Marker, Properties, Relative To key. The marker must be a Delta marker to make this attribute relevant.
Page 366: Marker Settings Diagram
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Marker Settings Diagram Lets you configure the Marker system using a visual utility. It is the same as "Marker Settings Diagram" on page 358 in Settings. 3.2.8 Meas Setup Contains functions for setting up the measurement parameters, and for setting up parameters global to all measurements in the Mode.
Page 367: Average Mode
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state OFF|ON Range Average Mode Sets the Average Mode: – EXPonential, The measurement averaging continues using the specified number of averages to compute each averaged value. The average is displayed at the end of each sweep –...
Page 368: Time Avg Num
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement front panel access because they are not an Average function AUTO Couplings selects Power (RMS) averaging if a Marker Function (Marker Noise, Band/Intvl Power) is on Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Range Log-Pwr Avg | Power (RMS) | Voltage Auto Function...
Page 369: Meas Time
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement trigger period is set to the current Meas Time value. Any changes to Meas Time change the Periodic trigger period to the same value and vice versa. If a trigger source other than Periodic trigger is manually selected, the Time Avg Num Auto/Man toggle is set to Man.
Page 370: Sample Rate
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Min/Max 1.000 us/100.0 s 1.000 us/3200 s Sample Rate Sets an arbitrary sample rate for the acquired data to be processed. [:SENSe]:WAVeform:SRATe <freq> Remote Command [:SENSe]:WAVeform:SRATe? :WAV:SRAT 1.3636 MHz Example Notes The command and query are available when Option DP2, B40, or wider IF Bandwidth option is installed.
Page 371: Meas Setup Summary Table
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Option B2X 255 MHz path 300 MHz Option B5X 510 MHz path 600 MHz Option R10 1 GHz path 1.2 GHz Option R15 1.5 GHz path 2.4 GHz Option R20 2 GHz path 2.4 GHz Option R40 4 GHz path 5.1 GHz...
Page 372 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement [:SENSe]:WAVeform:SAVoid[:STATe] ON | OFF | 0 | 1 Remote Command [:SENSe]:WAVeform:SAVoid[:STATe]? :WAV:SAVoid ON Example :WAV:SAVoid? Dependencies Only appears in VXT models M9410A/11A/15A/16A and M9410E/11E/15E/16E Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state ON|OFF Range More Information...
Page 373 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Option Max Digital IF BW 400 MHz 800 MHz 1200 MHz Center frequency limitation: Center Frequency Max Digital IF BW 330 MHz ~ 380 MHz (CF – 330 MHz) * 2 380 MHz ~ 550 MHz 100 MHz 550 MHz ~ 1310 MHz...
Page 374: Auto Couple
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement M9415E/16E Option Limitation: Option Maximum IF BW 400 MHz 800 MHz 1200 MHz Center Frequency Limitation: Center Frequency Maximum IF BW 1 MHz ~ 10 MHz (Option LFE) 500 kHz 10 MHz ~ 20 MHz (Option LFE) 5 MHz 20 MHz ~ 60 MHz (Option LFE) 10 MHz...
Page 375 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement :COUP ALL Example :COUPLE ALL | NONE Backwards Compatibility SCPI Backwards :COUP:NONE puts all Auto/Man parameters in manual mode, decoupling all the coupled instrument Compatibility parameters. It is retained for backwards compatibility and is not recommended for making Notes measurements or new designs All Auto/Man parameter couplings in the measurement are set to Auto.
Page 376: Meas Preset
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement – Video BANDwidth VBW/RBW ratio – Upper and Lower Tone (set to Sense) – Zero span measurement Resolution Bandwidth – Zero span measurement Dwell Time Harmonics (SA Mode only) Parameters affected by Auto Couple are: –...
Page 377 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement The External path selection is only shown when Option EDC is installed. It is grayed- out unless a valid Keysight oscilloscope is connected as an external digitizer. Connecting an External Digitizer Certain Keysight Oscilloscopes, including the M8131A Digitizer, can be connected to the Signal Analyzer in order to obtain even wider IF bandwidths than are available with the built-in Digitizers.
Page 378 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement – For N9042B, this is located on the lower left of the front panel Connect a USB3 cable (blue connectors) from the rear panel of the instrument to the rear panel of the Oscilloscope For best frequency accuracy, connect the 10 MHz reference out of the instrument to the 10 MHz reference in of the oscilloscope Make sure to use a USB3 cable (with blue connectors);...
Page 379 There are other USB ports on the front and rear panel of some instruments, but Keysight recommends the use of the USB3 ports on the rear panel, because those are high speed ports. Only...
Page 380 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Connecting an M8131A as an External Digitizer The M8131A Digitizer is a 2-slot module that plugs into a Keysight AXIe chassis (M9502A or M9505A). In order to connect the Digitizer, the instrument must connect to the PCIe or USB3 port of the AXIe chassis. USB3 connection is slower, but easier to use, and is the only option for N9041B.
Page 381 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement IF Path Auto When IF Path Auto is ON, the measurement automatically selects between the IF Paths based on the current measurement’s Digital IF Bandwidth setting. When the measurement tries to set a Digital IF Bandwidth between 10 and 25 MHz, the IF Path parameter automatically switches from 10 MHz ...
Page 382 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement When B2X/B5X/B1G/B1500M/B2G/B4G paths are available, in Auto mode, the selections may be disabled if the center frequency of the measurement is not in range of the minimum/maximum center frequency requirement for these IF Paths. Depending on the specific hardware, the minimum/maximum center frequency varies for these IF Paths.
Page 383 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Option Path 4 GHz Depends on hardware In cases where the path is not available but is selected from SCPI, error -241,”Hardware missing; Option not installed” is generated Dependencies Option Availability Dependence 25 MHz Only when 25 MHz or wider IF Bandwidth option is installed 40 MHz...
Page 384: Apply Edc Preset
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement The PSA Spectrum Analyzer had a command to set the IF Path to “Wide” or “Narrow”. X-Series instruments have more choices for IF Path so, for backwards compatibility, the PSA command [:SENSe]:<meas>:IFPath NARRow|WIDE mapped as follows: –...
Page 385: Advanced
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement In cases where the path is not available but is selected from SCPI, error -241,”Hardware missing; Option not installed” is generated Dependencies The External path is visible (but grayed-out) only when Option EDC is installed State Saved 3.2.8.3 Advanced Contains advanced functions that are used for specific applications.
Page 386 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Parameter Options & Installed Options The Phase Noise Optimization control lets you optimize the setup and behavior of the Local Oscillator (LO) depending on your specific measurement conditions. You may wish to trade off noise and speed, for example, to make a measurement faster without regard to noise or with optimum noise characteristics without regard to speed.
Page 387 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement The LO phase noise is optimized for smaller offsets from the carrier, at the expense of phase noise farther out. The actual frequency offset within which noise is optimized is shown with in square brackets, as this can vary depending on the hardware set in use.
Page 388 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement The actual frequency offset beyond which noise is optimized is shown with in square brackets, as this can vary depending on the hardware set in use. For example, in some instruments this annotation appears as [offset >30 kHz] In instruments with Option EP0, the LO is configured for the best possible phase noise at offsets up to 600 kHz from the carrier whenever there are no significant spurs within the span observed with an on-screen carrier.
Page 389 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Models with Option Conditions Selection Center frequency is < 699.9 kHz "Balanced" on page 387 Models with option EP0 have a two stage local oscillator, which switches Span > 114.1 MHz, or "Fast Tuning"...
Page 390 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Models with Option Conditions Selection Note that in these models, the Source Mode is set to “Tracking” hardware does not actually provide for an extra-fast tuning option, so the Center frequency is < 25 kHz, or "Best Close-in"...
Page 391: Adc Dither
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement ADC Dither Toggles the dither function On and Off. The dither function improves linearity for low level signals, at the expense of a higher noise floor. The reduced clipping-to-noise ratio results in higher noise because the clipping level of the ADC relative to the front terminals remains unchanged with the introduction of dither.
Page 392: Lo Dither
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement LO Dither When LO Dither is turned on, the local oscillator frequency is rapidly changed by small, random amounts. This helps spread the power of spurious signals within the passband, which lowers their level, thus increasing dynamic range. This is only required in very wide passbands, so this feature only appears with Option H1G.
Page 393: If Gain Offset
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement gain setting, but you must ensure that your measurement conditions will not overload the IF (in the HIGH gain range), that your signals are well above the noise floor (for the gain range), and that the signals are not changing.
Page 394: Other If Gain
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement amplitude of small signals, as long as you do not overdrive the hardware. Wideband gain should usually be adjusted after setting the input attenuation. Internally, the IF Gain value will change based on the current configuration of the Hardware.
Page 395: Mixing Mode
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement State Saved Saved in instrument state Min/Max Depends upon hardware present Mixing Mode Lets you alternate between mixing modes for the Local Oscillator (LO). The default setting is NORMal LO mixing mode, which is determined by the instrument configuration to be either “high side”...
Page 396 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement [:SENSe]:WAVeform:LO:MIXMode NORMal | ALTernate Remote Command [:SENSe]:WAVeform:LO:MIXMode? :WAV:LO:MIXM NORM Example :WAV:LO:MIXM? Dependencies Not available in N9000B Grayed-out when the RF Input is set to something other than (such as External Mixer). If you press IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 397: Invert Spectrum
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement the grayed-out control, a warning message “Feature only available with Signal Input RF” appears If you try to set Mixing Mode via SCPI when disabled, a message -221,"Settings conflict; Feature only available with signal input RF"...
Page 398: Mixing Mode State (Remote Command Only)
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Valid Measurement Keywords This function is available only in certain Modes and measurements. Only the following listed values of <meas> are valid. <meas> Mode(s) Meas BASIC SPECtrum Complex Spectrum BASIC WAVeform IQ Waveform EDGEGSM LTEAFDD...
Page 399: If Frequency (Remote Command Only)
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement between High and Low Range High | Low IF Frequency (Remote Command Only) Available only in the Complex Spectrum, Streaming, and Waveform measurements. Returns the current IF Frequency used in the IF Path. [:SENSe]:SPECtrum:IF:FREQuency? Remote Command...
Page 400: Global Emc Std
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement When Mode Preset is pressed while Global Center Freq is ON, the Global Center Freq is preset to the preset Center Frequency of the current Mode. This function resets to when "Restore Defaults"...
Page 401: Restore Defaults
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Restore Defaults Resets all functions in the Global settings menu to OFF. Pressing System, Restore Defaults, All Modes has the same effect. :INSTrument:COUPle:DEFault Remote Command :INST:COUP:DEF Example :GLOBal:DEFault Backwards Compatibility SCPI 3.2.8.5 Sample Period (Aperture) Setting (Remote Query Only) Returns the time between samples (sample period or aperture).
Page 402 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement – Pressing the Restart key – Sending :INIT:IMM – Sending :INIT:REST "More Information" on page 402 :INITiate[:IMMediate] Remote Command :INITiate:RESTart :INIT:IMM Example :INIT:REST :INIT:REST :INIT:IMM Notes perform exactly the same function Couplings Resets average/hold count k.
Page 403 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement – Restarts the current sweep – Restarts the current measurement – Restarts the current set of sweeps if any trace is in Trace Average, Max Hold or Min Hold – Restarts the current set of measurements if Averaging, or Max Hold, or Min Hold is on for the measurement If there is no Average or Max/Min Hold function (no trace in Trace Average or Hold, or Average/Hold Num set to 1), and no Waterfall window is being displayed, a single...
Page 404: Pause/Resume
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Sweep and Trigger Reset Resetting the sweep system resets the average/hold count k to 0. It also resets the set point counter to 0. Resetting the trigger system resets the internal auto trig timer to the value set by the Auto Trig control.
Page 405 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Example Put instrument into Single measurement operation: :INIT:CONT 0 :INIT:CONT OFF Put instrument into Continuous measurement operation: :INIT:CONT 1 :INIT:CONT ON Preset Note that :SYST:PRES sets :INIT:CONT to ON, but *RST sets :INIT:CONT State Saved...
Page 406: Abort (Remote Command Only)
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement If the instrument is already in Continuous sweep: – :INIT:CONT 1 has no effect – :INIT:CONT 0 places the instrument in Single Sweep but has no effect on the current sequence until k = N, at which point the current sequence will stop and the instrument will go to the idle state "Restart"...
Page 407: Scale
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement :INIT:CONT is OFF, then :INIT:IMM is used to start a single measurement, with sweep (data acquisition) occurring once the trigger condition has been met Dependencies For continuous measurement, :ABORt is equivalent to the Restart key Not all measurements support this command STATus:OPERation Status Bits/OPC...
Page 408: Ref Position
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Notes View 1 is the RF Envelope View View 2 is the I/Q Waveform View Couplings If X "Auto Scaling" on page 408 is ON, this value is automatically determined by the measurement result. When you set a value manually, X Auto Scaling automatically changes to Preset 200.0 us...
Page 409: Recording
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement 3.2.9.3 Recording The controls in this tab are available in the Complex Spectrum and Waveform measurements. They are not available in the Streaming measurement. Record Time The duration of the recording that will occur when the "Record"...
Page 410: Record
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement :SPEC:REC:POINts 100 Example :SPEC:REC:POINts? Dependencies In general, "Record Time" on page 409 is prioritized over Record Points. Thus, Record Points is updated whenever Record Time or the Sample Rate is changed. The Sample Rate in the Complex Spectrum measurement is controlled by the Span and/or Digital IF BW parameters Preset 10000000...
Page 411: Quick Save
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.2 IQ Waveform Measurement Quick Save When this control is pressed, the data currently in the HW memory is saved to the file with the name that was specified last with the added file number. For instance, if the latest recording file was saved with the file name MyData.binf, MyData_ then pressing Quick Save saves the data in HW memory with the file name...
Page 412: Streaming Measurement
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.3 Streaming Measurement 3.3 Streaming Measurement The Streaming measurement provides wideband streaming capability for the instrument. For the convenience of users familiar with the "Complex Spectrum Measurement" on page 143, the Streaming measurement controls are very similar to those for Complex Spectrum.
Page 413 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.3 Streaming Measurement described in the section SCPI Operation and Results Query in the topic Programming the Instrument. For details of how to start/stop streaming, see "How To Start and Stop Streaming" on page 415 below.
Page 414 3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.3 Streaming Measurement Return Value frequency) Not used Returns a trace containing the shape of the FFT window Returns trace data of the phase of the FFT versus frequency Returns comma-separated linear spectrum trace data in Volts RMS Returns comma-separated averaged linear spectrum trace data in Volts RMS Returns the following comma-separated scalar results: 1.
Page 415: Views
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.3 Streaming Measurement Return Value Averaged delta magnitude trace in dB (-999 when I/Q Magnitude and Phase Delta Results not available) Averaged delta phase trace in radians (-999 when I/Q Magnitude and Phase Delta Results not available) How To Start and Stop Streaming Start Streaming To start streaming, or to stream data out of the instrument, you must explicitly start...
Page 416: Windows
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.3 Streaming Measurement 3.3.2 Windows The following windows are available in the Streaming measurement. Spectrum Window The Spectrum window displays amplitude versus frequency information. RF Envelope Window The RF Envelope window displays amplitude versus time information. Status Window The Status window displays statistics for the streaming session in progress.
Page 417: Start Streaming
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.3 Streaming Measurement -221,"Settings conflict; Cannot change value while Streaming is in progress" Dependencies If Streaming Duration Type is set to INFinite, this key is grayed-out If a SCPI query is sent while Streaming Duration Type is set to INFinite, the return value is 9.9E+37 If you try to change Streaming Duration while Streaming Duration Type is set to INFinite, it generates the error message: -221,"Settings conflict;...
Page 418: Streaming Status (Remote Queries Only)
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.3 Streaming Measurement Streaming Status (Remote Queries Only) The queries described in this section can be used to determine the status of an in- progress streaming session. The values are read-only, and are estimates for the streaming session in progress.
Page 419: Total Samples
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.3 Streaming Measurement Total Samples Returns the number of samples expected to be streamed when streaming has completed. [:SENSe]:STReaming:ACQuisition:SAMPles:TOTal? Remote Command :STR:ACQ:SAMP:TOT? Example Type is set to INFinite, returns the value Dependencies "Streaming Duration" on page 416 9223372036854774784 If Streaming Duration Type is set to FINite, the number of samples is derived from Streaming Duration and sample rate...
Page 420: Context Packets
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.3 Streaming Measurement Dependencies You cannot change the value while streaming is in progress. If you try to change the value while streaming is in progress, it generates error message: -221,"Settings conflict; Cannot change value while Streaming is in progress" Vita 49 Enables/Disables Vita 49 standard format for the streamed data.
Page 421: All Other Menus
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.3 Streaming Measurement :STR:VIT:SUMM 1 Example :STR:VIT:SUMM? Notes You cannot change the value while streaming is in progress. If you try to change the value while streaming is in progress, it generates error message: -221,"Settings conflict; Cannot change value while Streaming is in progress" Preset State Saved ON|OFF...
Page 422: Fast (Deep) Capture
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.4 Fast (Deep) Capture 3.4 Fast (Deep) Capture Fast capture/transfer of large amounts of IQ data is supported over SCPI. To do this, first set up the desired measurement range, center frequency, span, triggering, and so on.
Page 423: Fast Capture Length
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.4 Fast (Deep) Capture When the word size is 32-bit, points can only be retrieved on even sample NOTE number boundaries. That is, the pointer and block length must be even numbers. Therefore, when the word size is set to AUTO, it is recommended that the pointer and block size be only set to even numbers.
Page 424: Fast Capture Word Length
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.4 Fast (Deep) Capture 3.4.2 Fast Capture Word Length Specifies the internal fast capture word length. Shorter word length enables twice the time length to be captured, at the cost of quantization noise. Note that this does not affect the format of data returned by :FETCh:FCAPture, only the internal representation.
Page 425: Fast Capture Pointer
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.4 Fast (Deep) Capture Dependson instrument Can be determined by sending :FCAP:BLOC? MAX before setting block size using the command 3.4.5 Fast Capture Pointer Sets the pointer position for the Fast Capture transfer in samples (points). The pointer is incremented by the block size each time the fetch is performed.
Page 426: Fast Capture Peak
3 IQ Analyzer (Basic) Mode 3.4 Fast (Deep) Capture 3.4.7 Fast Capture Peak Finds the Maximum Peak Amplitude value found in the entire Deep Capture IQ data. "Initiate Fast Capture" on page 424 (:FCAP:INIT) must have been called, or else SCPI returns NAN, with error code -230.
Page 427: System
X-Series Signal Analyzers IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference 4 System The System hardkey and the “gear” icon both open the System Settings dialog, which allows you to access various configuration menus and dialogs. The line of tabs down the left side let you choose various pages for configuring your instrument. Notes No remote command for this key specifically...
Page 428: System
4 System 4.1 System 4.1 System Allows access to several general system functions, including three Show screens for viewing system parameters. Several such Show screens are available on this and other System menu pages. They can also be accessed with the SCPI command described here.
Page 429: Show System Contents (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.1 System :SYST:SHOW SYST Example 4.1.1.1 Show System contents (Remote Query Only) Returns the contents of the Show System screen (the entire contents, not just the currently displayed page). :SYSTem:CONFigure[:SYSTem]? Remote Command :SYST:CONF? Example Notes The output is an IEEE Block format of the Show System contents. Each line is separated by a new-line character 4.1.1.2 Computer System description (Remote Query Only) Returns the Computer System description, which consists of the operating system...
Page 430: Show Support Subscriptions
4 System 4.1 System 4.1.4 Show Support Subscriptions Displays the software support subscription information for the licenses available on the instrument. Shows the software license, description, software support expiration date (format is YYYY.MMDD), and the software support status. The Software Version Date (format is YYYY.MMDD) shown in the header indicates the date required to access the latest software enhancements included in this version of the software.
Page 431: Control Panel
4 System 4.1 System The Copy all to clipboard … control copies all the data to the Windows clipboard, in comma-separated value (CSV) format. :SYST:SHOW SID Example 4.1.6 Control Panel… Opens the Windows Control Panel. Control Panel is used to configure certain elements of Windows that are not configured via the Multitouch UI System menus.
Page 432: Web Browser
4 System 4.1 System 4.1.7 Web Browser Launches the instrument’s default Web Browser. Usually, the default is Microsoft Edge. A mouse and external keyboard are highly desirable for using the browser. To return focus to the Instrument Application, close the browser (or use Alt-Tab). This feature is not available if Option SF1 is installed.
Page 433 4 System 4.1 System IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 434: I/O Config
4 System 4.2 I/O Config 4.2 I/O Config Allows you to specify and change the I/O configuration for remote control. Controls in this menu allow configuration of the I/O ports used for SCPI remote control over GPIB and LAN. The SCPI LAN parameters are set using controls in this menu, but configuration of LAN settings themselves is performed using the Windows Control Panel (DHCP, Gateway, Subnet Mask, etc.).
Page 435: Scpi Lan
4 System 4.2 I/O Config When GPIB Controller is enabled, the analyzer application itself cannot be NOTE controlled over GPIB. In this case, it can be controlled via LAN or USB. The GPIB port cannot be a Controller and Device at the same time. Only one Controller can be active on the GPIB bus at any given time.
Page 436: Scpi Telnet
4 System 4.2 I/O Config – "SCPI Telnet" on page 436 – "SCPI Socket" on page 436 – "SICL Server" on page 437 – "HiSLIP Server" on page 438 – "Verbose SCPI On/Off" on page 438 – "SCPI Socket Control Port (Remote Query Only)" on page 440 4.2.2.1 SCPI Telnet Turns SCPI LAN telnet capability On or Off, allowing you to limit SCPI access over LAN through telnet.
Page 437: Sicl Server
4 System 4.2 I/O Config Preset Unaffected by Preset, but set to by Restore Defaults >"Misc" on page 482 If not set up or specified, the Secure Instrument Communications configuration setting: is State Saved OFF|ON Range 4.2.2.3 SICL Server Turns the SICL Server capability or OFF, to limit SCPI access over LAN through the SICL server.
Page 438: Hislip Server
4 System 4.2 I/O Config 4.2.2.4 HiSLIP Server Turns the HiSLIP Server capability or OFF, to limit SCPI access over LAN through the HiSLIP server. HiSLIP stands for High-Speed LAN Instrument Protocol, and is part of the IVI-6.1 specification. Example of a VISA connection string used to connect to the HiSLIP Server on an X- Series Spectrum Analyzer: TCPIP0::a-n9030a-93016::hislip0::INSTR hislip0...
Page 439: Device Clear On Disconnect
4 System 4.2 I/O Config See the example below, where the invalid command :SENS:BOGUS is sent: Normal response to :SYST:ERR? (using the Telnet window): SCPI> SENS:BOGUS SCPI> SYST:ERR? -113,"Undefined header" After turning on Verbose SCPI: SCPI> SYST:BOGUS SCPI> SYST:ERR? -113,"Undefined header;SYST:BOGUS<Err>" :SYSTem:ERRor:VERBose OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :SYSTem:ERRor:VERBose?
Page 440: Scpi Socket Control Port (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.2 I/O Config State Saved OFF|ON Range 4.2.2.7 SCPI Socket Control Port (Remote Query Only) Returns the TCP/IP port number of the control socket associated with the SCPI socket session. This query lets you obtain the unique port number to open when a device clear is to be sent to the instrument.
Page 441: System Idn Response
4 System 4.2 I/O Config This control lets you set the web password as desired, or to reset the password to the factory default. Selecting Web Password Reset displays a control for resetting the password as desired, or to the factory default. The built-in alpha keyboard appears. You may change the password from the factory default of “measure4u”.
Page 442: User Idn
Starting with software version x.14.50, the *IDN? response in the Factory configuration indicates the Manufacturer as Keysight Technologies. If your test software is expecting the response to indicate Agilent Technologies, you can configure the response with this menu selection or SCPI command.
Page 443: System:persona (Remote Commands Only)
4 System 4.2 I/O Config If you enter a null string (for example, by clearing the User String while editing and then pressing Done), the instrument automatically reverts to the FACTory setting. In products that run multiple instances of the X-Series Application, all instances NOTE use the same User System IDN response.
Page 444: System:persona:manufacturer
4 System 4.2 I/O Config :SYST:PERS:DEF is equivalent to: :SYSTem:IDN “” :SYSTem:IDN:CONF DEF SYSTem:PERSona:MANufacturer Sets the MANufacturer field of the *IDN? response. This is the first field of the *IDN? response. :SYSTem:PERSona:MANufacturer <string> Remote Command :SYSTem:PERSona:MANufacturer? Notes When setting the MANufacturer field, the current IDN response string is modified to replace the manufacturer field with the string specified by the command.
Page 445: System:persona:model:default
Resets the LAN connection. This sets parameters as follows, and restarts the LAN operation: DHCP Enabled Automatic IP Address Enabled ICMP Ping Responder Enabled keysight Web Password Dynamic DNS Enabled mDNS and DNS-SD Enabled Dynamic Link Local Addressing Enabled Auto Negotiation Enabled There is no SCPI command for this function.
Page 446: Restore I/O Config Defaults
4 System 4.2 I/O Config :LXI:IDEN ON Example Preset Not part of Preset, but reset to by Restore Defaults >"All" on page 483 State Saved OFF | ON Range 4.2.6 Restore I/O Config Defaults Causes the group of settings associated with the I/O Config menu to be reset to their default values.
Page 447: Usb Packet Count (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.2 I/O Config :SYSTem:COMMunicate:USB:STATus? Remote Command :SYST:COMM:USB:STAT? Example Notes SUSPended – Indicates that the USB bus is currently in its suspended state. The bus is in the suspended state when: – The bus is not connected to any controller –...
Page 448 4 System 4.2 I/O Config To help achieve this cooperative instrument sharing, the following remote commands are provided: – "Lock Remote I/O Request (Remote Query only)" on page 449 – "Unlock Remote I/O Session (Remote Command only)" on page 450 –...
Page 449: Lock Remote I/O Request (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.2 I/O Config Interface Single-session Multi-Session LAN VXI-11 ü (SICL) LAN Socket ü LAN HiSLIP ü LAN Telnet ü If using a single-session interface, care must be taken to ensure only one client uses the single-session interface. In particular, LAN VXI-11 (SICL) interface is a single-session interface, even though multiple clients could simultaneously connect to this interface.
Page 450: Unlock Remote I/O Session (Remote Command Only)
4 System 4.2 I/O Config – *OPT? – *STB? – *ESR? – :SYSTem:DATE? – :SYSTem:TIME? – :SYSTem:PON:TIME? – Queries in the :STATus subsystem – Queries in the :SYSTem:ERRor subsystem – Queries in the :SYSTem:LKEY subsystem – Queries in the :SYSTem:LOCK subsystem –...
Page 451: Remote I/O Session Lock Owner (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.2 I/O Config :SYST:LOCK:NAME? Example Notes The information returned is a string of the format: <I/O Interface>[/<IP address>/<Session ID>] Where IP address Session ID are only provided for interfaces that provide multiple sessions Single Session interfaces (GPIB, USB-488, and LAN VXI-11) only list interface name Session ID is an internally generated identifier.
Page 452: Multiple Network Adapters Enabled (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.2 I/O Config These commands do not apply to instruments that have only one NIC. The commands apply to all modular deployments that have a controller with multiple NICs. To configure and query these configuration options, the following remote commands are provided: –...
Page 453: Config Ipv6 Address (Remote Command Only)
4 System 4.2 I/O Config 4.2.11.3 Config IPV6 Address (Remote Command Only) :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPV6:CONFig <ipaddress> Remote Command :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPV6:CONFig? :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPV6:CONFig "2001:0db8:85a3:0000:0000:8a2e:0370:7334" Example :SYSTem:COMMunicate:LAN:IPV6:CONFig? Notes Applies to instruments that have multiple Network Adapters. When more than one network adapter is present in the system, you must specify in the instrument config file the IP address to use to enable Remoting channel bindings.
Page 454: Preload / Unload Modes
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes The X-Series platform supports many Modes. Each Mode that is loaded uses a portion of the total available memory. At some point, this may result in insufficient free memory. This can occur during a measurement, or when loading a new Mode. A limited number of Modes can be loaded without impacting performance.
Page 455: Table Of Modes
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes 4.3.2 Table of Modes The table of Modes becomes scrollable when the number of Modes exceeds the dialog’s displayable size. Use the check boxes in the Preload column to enable or disable the preloading of the Modes that you want.
Page 456: Loaded Modes (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes Command :INST:UNL NR5G Example Notes Error message if the specified Mode is not available, -224,"Illegal parameter value;<mode> is not a valid choice" Error message if the specified Mode is not loaded and therefore cannot be unloaded, -221,"Settings conflict;<mode>...
Page 457: Menu Panel Tabs
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes 4.3.7.2 Menu Panel Tabs Allows the Menu Panel Tabs to be positioned on the RIGHt LEFT side of the menu panel. :SYSTem:DISPlay:MPTab RIGHt | LEFT Remote Command :SYSTem:DISPlay:MPTab? :SYST:DISP:MPT LEFT Example RIGHt Preset This is unaffected by Preset but is set to by Restore Defaults >...
Page 458: Backlight
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes – FILLed: this is the normal theme using filled objects – OUTLine: this theme uses color, but does not use fill for most areas on the display. It is ideal for images that need to be printed on inkjet printers. Although setting Display Theme to OUTLine does not affect screen image saves or prints,...
Page 459: Backlight Intensity
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes application. Pressing any other key turns backlight ON, and could potentially perform the action as well. :DISPlay:BACKlight ON | OFF Remote Command :DISPlay:BACKlight? Example Turn backlight ON: :DISP:BACK ON Turn backlight OFF: :DISP:BACK OFF Preset Pressing any key turns the backlight back ON, as does Restore Defaults >...
Page 460: Touch On/Off
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes (the default), adjusting the value with the front panel Up/Down keys or the RPG hides the Numeric Entry Panel. :SYSTem:DISPlay:NEPimmediate ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :SYSTem:DISPlay:NEPimmediate? :SYST:DISP:NEP OFF Example Preset This is unaffected by Preset but is set to by Restore Defaults >...
Page 461: Screen Tabs Left/Right
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes auto-filename in the entry area. You can then press Enter to accept the auto filename, or edit the name then press Enter. This allows you to easily save a file with a custom file name. :MMEMory:STORe:QSAVe NORMal | PROMpt Remote Command...
Page 462: Hide Screen Tabs In Full Screen
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes Preset This is unaffected by Preset but is set to LEFT by Restore Defaults > "User Interface" on page 481 Restore Defaults >"All" on page 483 State Saved Power On Persistent (survives shutdown and restart) 4.3.7.13 Hide Screen Tabs in Full Screen This switch, when in the position, causes the Screen Tabs to be hidden when in...
Page 463: 2-Screen Orientation
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes 4.3.7.14 2-Screen Orientation When you add a second Screen using the “+” control on the Screen Tabs bar, normally the screen is added to the right of the first screen. However, sometimes it is better to add the new screen below the first screen rather than to the right, as shown below.
Page 464: Clock Format
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes New screen added below (vertical orientation) The 2-Screen Orientation switch allows you to choose between these two orientations for 2-Screen configurations. The default is the HORizontal configuration, two Screens side-by-side. :INSTrument:SCReen:ORIentation VERTical | HORizontal Remote Command :INST:SCR:ORI VERT...
Page 465: Language
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes 4.3.7.16 Language Accesses the selection of Language displayed on the menus and controls. ENGLish is the default. All Measurement Applications that share common controls will display the localized controls. The description on the control labels is bounded by the control size. Any given language will have labels in that language that are shorter or longer than the equivalent label in English.
Page 466: User Interface Type (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.3 Preload / Unload Modes This will reset all of the User Interface variables to their default state, including the menu panel location, display theme, and language. It will not affect Alignment data or settings. This action cannot be undone. Do you want to proceed? The message provides OK and Cancel buttons for you to affirm or cancel the operation.
Page 467: Power On
4 System 4.4 Power On 4.4 Power On Lets you select how the instrument should power on. In products that run multiple instances of the X-Series Application, the same NOTE Power On type is shared between all the instances. 4.4.1 Power On State Lets you select whether the instrument powers up in a default state, or some other state.
Page 468 4 System 4.4 Power On User Preset Sets Power On State to USER Preset. When the instrument is powered on in User Preset, it will User Preset each mode and switch to the "Power On Application" on page 469. Power OnUser Preset does not affect any settings other than those set by a normal User Preset.
Page 469: Power On Application
4 System 4.4 Power On If line power to the instrument is interrupted, for example by pulling the line cord plug or by switching off power to a test rack, Power OnLast State may not work properly. For proper operation, Power On Last State depends on your shutting down the instrument using the Standby key or the :SYSTem:PDOWn command.
Page 470 4 System 4.4 Power On functionality for both options, so you must decide which FPGA program you want loaded. When licenses allow for both FPGA image versions to be available, and you have not explicitly chosen an FPGA image version, then, when the firmware is updated, the Time Domain Scan version will be loaded.
Page 471 4 System 4.4 Power On silently reverts to FS1 behavior. Switching Between Enhanced Sweep Speed and Time Domain Scan FPGA Images You cannot have both full TDS and FS2 images at the same time, so to switch to the other image, you must go through the process of reloading the FPGA by choosing the desired image with the Selected FPGA control, and pressing "Load FPGA"...
Page 472: Fpga Load Preference
4 System 4.4 Power On b. If FPGA Load Preference is Enhanced Sweep Speed, the Enhanced Sweep Speed FPGA image is loaded c. If FPGA Load Preference is Prompt at Startup: a. If the last FPGA Configuration Load was Time Domain Scan, the Time Domain Scan FPGA image is loaded b.
Page 473: Load Fpga
This can take 15 minutes or more. NOTE If power is lost during the FPGA load process, the FPGA can become corrupted, CAUTION in which case the only solution is to return it to Keysight for servicing. :SYSTem:PON:FPGA:LOAD TDS | FS2 Remote Command :SYST:PON:FPGA:LOAD TDS...
Page 474: Restore Power On Defaults
4 System 4.4 Power On Selection limited to licensed features: – selection requires EMC Mode and Option TDS – requires Option FS2 The UI is blanked when there is only one licensed selection, and that selection is already loaded. Sending the SCPI for an unlicensed selection results in error: -224, “Illegal parameter value;...
Page 475 Access to Configure Applications utility A version of the utility runs the first time you power up the instrument after purchasing it from Keysight. The utility automatically configures preloads so that as many licensed applications as possible are preloaded while keeping the total estimated virtual memory usage below the limit.
Page 476 4 System 4.4 Power On Instructions are provided below and in the utility. Use the utility to find a configuration that works best for you, and then restart the analyzer program. Select All Marks all applications in the selection list. This allows you to enable all applications licensed on the instrument for pre-loading, or is a convenience for selecting all applications in one operation and then letting you deselect individual applications Deselect All...
Page 477: Configure Applications - Instrument Boot-Up
4 System 4.4 Power On 1. It will not let you preload more applications than will fit into memory at once 2. You can determine how many of your favorite applications can reside in memory at one time The utility provides a graphical representation of the amount of memory (note that the amount of memory shown here is virtual memory, which is a limitation imposed by the operating system, not by the amount of physical memory you have in your instrument).
Page 478: Configuration List (Remote Command Only)
4 System 4.4 Power On – "Configuration list (Remote Command Only)" on page 478 – "Configuration Memory Available (Remote Query Only)" on page 478 – "Configuration Memory Total (Remote Query Only)" on page 478 – "Configuration Memory Used (Remote Query Only)" on page 479 –...
Page 479: Configuration Memory Used (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.4 Power On 4.4.7.4 Configuration Memory Used (Remote Query Only) Returns the amount of Virtual Memory used by all measurement applications. :SYSTem:PON:APPLication:VMEMory:USED? Remote Command :SYST:PON:APPL:VMEM:USED? Example Preset Not affected by Preset 4.4.7.5 Configuration Application Memory (Remote Query Only) Returns the amount of Virtual Memory a particular application consumes.
Page 480: Restore Defaults
4 System 4.5 Restore Defaults 4.5 Restore Defaults Provides initialization of system setting groups, including the option to set the entire instrument back to a factory default state. In products that run multiple instances of the X-Series Application, all instances NOTE have the same factory default states for Restore Defaults.
Page 481: I/O Config
4 System 4.5 Restore Defaults 4.5.2 I/O Config Causes the group of settings associated with the I/O Config menu to be reset to their default values. This also happens on Restore Misc Defaults, which has a SCPI command, although I/O Config does not. When I/O Config is selected, a message appears saying: This will reset all of the I/O Config variables to their default state, including the GPIB address and SCPI LAN settings...
Page 482: Alignments
4 System 4.5 Restore Defaults The dialog includes OK and Cancel controls, for you to affirm or cancel the operation. :SYST:DEF PON Example 4.5.5 Alignments Causes the Alignments system settings to be reset to their default values. This does not affect any Alignment data stored in the system. After performing this function, it may impact the auto-alignment time of the instrument until a new alignment baseline has been established.
Page 483: All
Do you want to proceed? The dialog includes OK and Cancel controls, for you to confirm or cancel the operation. If you are using a Keysight USB External Mixer, then you will need to perform NOTE Refresh USB Mixer Connection (SCPI command...
Page 484 4 System 4.5 Restore Defaults :SYST:DEF ALL Example Couplings All causes the currently running measurement to be aborted, and sets all modes to a consistent state, so it is unnecessary to couple any settings Backwards Compatibility SCPI :SYST:PRES:PERS :SYST:DEF ALL Notes is the same as :SYSTem:PRESet:PERSistent...
Page 485: Alignments
4 System 4.6 Alignments 4.6 Alignments Accesses the alignment system of the instrument. You can control the automatic alignments, view alignment statistics and manually perform alignments. The current setting of the alignment system is displayed in the Meas Bar along the top of the display.
Page 486 4 System 4.6 Alignments – Off: Off (amber) Status Bits/OPC When Auto Align is executing, Bit 0 in the Status Operational register is set dependencies An interfering signal at the RF Input may prevent automatic alignment of the RF subsystem. If this occurs, the Error Condition message “Align RF skipped”...
Page 487 4 System 4.6 Alignments environment, the alignments occur one-ninth as often as in Normal. With these less frequent alignments, all accuracy specifications (those expressed with ±x dB tolerances) change by nominally a factor of 1.4. If the condition “Align Now, All required” is set, transitioning to Auto Align, Light performs the required alignments, clears the “Align Now, All required”...
Page 488: All But Rf
4 System 4.6 Alignments set to Off, you are now responsible for maintaining warranted operation by updating the alignments when they expire. The Auto Align, Alert mechanism will notify you when alignments have expired. One solution to expired alignments is to perform the Align All, Now operation.
Page 489 4 System 4.6 Alignments of four settings: Setting Option TTEMperature Time & Temperature LIGHt Time & Temperature Light WEEK 7 days NONE None With Auto Align set to Normal, the configuration of Alert is not relevant, because the instrument’s software maintains the instrument in warranted operation. TTEMperature A confirmation is required when a selection other than is chosen.
Page 490: Align Now
Keysight does not recommend using this selection in any other circumstances, because of the risk of accuracy performance drifting well beyond expected levels without the operator being informed.
Page 491 4 System 4.6 Alignments nature sequential, meaning they must complete before any other SCPI commands can be processed. In many cases the alignment itself will take longer than the typical SCPI timeout value. Furthermore, status cannot be easily queried while a sequential command is running.
Page 492: Align Now All
4 System 4.6 Alignments – "Align Now All" on page 492 – "Align Now All but RF" on page 494 – "Align Now RF" on page 496 – "Align Now Expired" on page 497 – "Align Now Preselector" on page 498 –...
Page 493 4 System 4.6 Alignments required” is generated, and bits 11 and 12 are set in the Status Questionable Calibration register. The query form of the remote commands (:CALibration[:ALL]? or *CAL?) invokes the alignment of all subsystems and returns a success or failure value. An interfering user signal is not grounds for failure;...
Page 494: Align Now All But Rf
4 System 4.6 Alignments interfering signal removed Couplings Initializes the time for the Last Align Now All Time Records the temperature for the Last Align Now All Temperature If Align RF component succeeded, initializes the time for the Last Align Now, RF Time If Align RF component succeeded, records the temperature for the Last Align Now, RF Temperature Status Bits/OPC Bits 11, 12, or 14 may be set in the Status Questionable Calibration register...
Page 495 4 System 4.6 Alignments This operation might be chosen instead of All if you do not want the device under test to experience a large change in input impedance, such as a temporary open circuit at the instrument input. The query form of the remote commands (:CALibration:NRF?) invokes the alignment and returns a success or failure value.
Page 496: Align Now Rf
4 System 4.6 Alignments :CALibration:NRF:NPENding (start the All but RF calibration) :STATus:OPERation:CONDition? (If bit 0 is set, then the system is doing calibration, you should do re-query until this bit is cleared) :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:CONDition? (to check if there are any errors/- failures in previous calibration procedure) 4.6.2.3 Align Now RF In PXE, the key label is Align Now RF Only...
Page 497: Align Now Expired
4 System 4.6 Alignments Successful completion clears the Error Conditions “Align RF skipped” and the Error Conditions “Align RF failed” and “Align Now, RF required”, and clears Bits 3, 11, and 12 in the Status Questionable Calibration register A failure encountered during alignment generates the Error Condition message “Align RF failed” and sets Bit 3 in the Status Questionable Calibration register An interfering user signal will result in Bits 11 and 12 being set in the Status Questionable Calibration register, to indicate Align Now, RF is required...
Page 498: Align Now Preselector
4 System 4.6 Alignments While Align Now Expired is performing the alignment, the Calibrating bit (Bit 0 in the Status Operation register) is set. Completion, or termination, clears Bit 0 in the Status Operation register This command is sequential; that is, it must complete before further SCPI commands are processed. Interrupting the alignment from remote is accomplished by invoking Device Clear followed by :ABORt Successful completion clears bit 14 in the Status Questionable Calibration register...
Page 499: Align Now All But Rf Preselector
4 System 4.6 Alignments 4.6.2.6 Align Now All but RF Preselector Only available in models with the RF Preselector, such as the N9048B. It is identical to the "Align Now All" on page 492 (plus RF Presel) function, except that the RF Preselector is only partially aligned.
Page 500: Align Now External Mixer
4 System 4.6 Alignments :CALibration:RFPSelector:ONLY? :CAL:RFPS:ONLY Example Notes Query returns 0 if successful, or 1 if failed When Align 20 Hz to 3.6 GHz is performing the alignment, bit 0 in the Status Operation register is set. Completion, or termination, will clear bit 0 in the Status Operation register This command is sequential;...
Page 501: Align Source
4 System 4.6 Alignments Interrupting the alignment from remote is accomplished by invoking Device Clear followed by the :ABORt command A failure encountered during alignment generate the Error Condition message “Align LO failed” and sets Bit 5 in the Status Questionable Calibration register. Successful completion clears the “Align LO failed”...
Page 502: Align Receiver
4 System 4.6 Alignments :CALibration:INTernal:SOURce:NPENding (start an internal source calibration) :STATus:OPERation:CONDition? (Check if the calibration is completed or not, If Bit 0 is set, then the system is doing calibration. Repeat this query until the bit is cleared) :STATus:QUEStionable:CALibration:EXTended:FAILure:CONDition? (Check if Bit 14 is set or not.
Page 503: Align Lo Leakage
4 System 4.6 Alignments It is suggested to perform Fast Alignment every 8 hours or when temperature has changed more than 5°C from the previous Fast Alignment. :CALibration:INTernal:FAST[:ALL] Remote Command :CALibration:INTernal:FAST[:ALL]? :CAL:INT:FAST Example Notes The query initiates an Alignment and returns 0 if successful, or 1 if failed Dependencies Only appears in VXT models M9410A/11A /15A/16A 4.6.2.12 Align LO Leakage...
Page 504: Align Fast Rrh Amplitude
4 System 4.6 Alignments Aligns the Amplitude of Remote Radio Head. This operation could take quite a long time to run. For M1741A/49A/49B RRH, make sure to connect 50-ohm terminations to Head CAUTION Tx/Rx 1 and 2 ports. :CALibration:INTernal:RRHead:AMPLitude Remote Command :CALibration:INTernal:RRHead:AMPLitude? :CAL:INT:RRH:AMPL? Example...
Page 505: Align Vxt Transceiver
4 System 4.6 Alignments Synchronizes RRH LO Clocks. :CALibration:INTernal:RRHead:LOSync Remote Command :CALibration:INTernal:RRHead:LOSync? :CAL:INT:RRH:LOS? Example Notes The query initiates an Alignment and returns 0 if successful, or 1 if failed Dependencies Only appears in VXT based solutions with M1741A/42A/49A/49B RRH :CALibration:INTernal:LOSync Backwards Compatibility SCPI :CALibration:INTernal:LOSync?
Page 506: Align Selected Freq Ranges
4 System 4.6 Alignments :CALibration:UPDown:CONVerter Remote Command :CALibration:UPDown:CONVerter? :CAL:UPD:CONV Example Notes The query initiates an Alignment and returns 0 if successful, or 1 if failed Dependencies Only appears on M9410E/11E/15E/16E 4.6.2.20 Align Selected Freq Ranges VXT models M9410A/11A provide five alignments: Align Now All, Align Source, Align Receiver, Align Fast and Align LO Leakage.
Page 507: Enable Extended Freq Range
4 System 4.6 Alignments Only functional for the following alignments: – Align Now All of VXT models M9410A/11A and M9410E/11E – Align Source – Align Receiver – Align Fast – Align LO Leakage – Align VXT Transceiver of M910E/11E – Align Up Down Converter of M9410E/11E Align Selected Freq Ranges only guarantees the hardware performance within the frequency range Preset Enable Extended Freq Range...
Page 508 4 System 4.6 Alignments Dependencies Only appears when "Align VXT Transceiver" on page 505 Error message “Invalid alignment frequency range” is reported if start and stop frequencies are invalid, such as: 1. Stop frequency - Start frequency < 0 2. the count of start and stop frequency is not even 3.
Page 509: Enable
4 System 4.6 Alignments Products Preset Receiver Source minimum Minimum Receiver Source with minimum settable center maximum maximum M9471A settable (center)frequency frequency settable(center) settable frequency with Spec frequency (center) frequency M941xE 1 GHz 330.000005 330 MHz 380MHz 26.499999995 26.5GHz without LFE option M941xE 1 GHz...
Page 510: Align Low Band
4 System 4.6 Alignments There is no alert for the External Mixer Path alignment. You are responsible for checking the temperature shift since the last Align Now, External Mixer Path, to determine whether the external mixer path alignment needs to be executed. :CALibration:INTernal:EMPath Remote Command :CALibration:INTernal:EMPath?
Page 511: Path Delay Calibration
4 System 4.6 Alignments This alignment corrects slow-rate drift, which does not impair specifications for NOTE time periods shorter than one week. Thus, you need only perform this alignment on a weekly basis to maintain specifications. This alignment typically takes >2 minutes to complete.
Page 512 4 System 4.6 Alignments Connect the RF In of the primary module to the OUT port (COMMON, PORT 1) NOTE of the combiner. Before performing Path Delay Calibration of Sources, please confirm that: NOTE – Each of the RF Out ports is connected to the RF In port of the Primary NOTE channel, using an RF combiner.
Page 513: Path Delay Correction On/Off(Remote Command Only)
4 System 4.6 Alignments 4.6.3.2 Path Delay Correction On/Off(Remote Command only) On/Off the path delay correction to enable the calibration data on the source of the module. :CALibration:PDELay:CORRection ON | OFF Remote Command :CALibration:PDELay:CORRection? :CAL:PDEL:CORR ON Example Notes If the Path Delay Calibration has never been performed and there is no calibration correction data in the controller, an alert is generated Preset ON|OFF...
Page 514 4 System 4.6 Alignments “Time while Auto Align off” is not available in VXT models M9410A/11A. A successful Align Now, RF sets the Last Align RF temperature to the current temperature, and resets the Last Align RF time. A successful Align Now All or Align Now All but RF sets the Last Align Now All temperature to the current temperature, and resets the Last Align Now All time.
Page 515 4 System 4.6 Alignments Query Current Temperature at Remote Radio Head :CALibration:TEMPerature:CURRent:RRHead? Remote Command :CAL:TEMP:CURR:RRH? Example Notes Value is in degrees Centigrade Dependencies Only appears when Align RRH Amplitude is available State Saved Query Current Temperature at Remote Radio Head LO :CALibration:TEMPerature:CURRent:RRHead:LO? Remote Command :CAL:TEMP:CURR:RRH:LO?
Page 516 4 System 4.6 Alignments Query Temperature of Last Align Now Receiver :CALibration:TEMPerature:INTernal:RECeiver? Remote Command :CAL:TEMP:INT:REC? Example Notes Value in degrees Centigrade when the last successful Align Now Receiver was executed Dependencies Only appears in VXT models M9410A/11A State Saved Query Time since Last Align Now Source :CALibration:TIME:INTernal:SOURce? Remote Command :CAL:TIME:INT:SOUR?
Page 517 4 System 4.6 Alignments Query Time since Last Align Now LO Leakage :CALibration:TIME:INTernal:LOLeakage? Remote Command :CAL:TIME:INT:LOL? Example Notes Value in hours since the last successful Align Now LO Leakage Dependencies Only appears in VXT models M9410A/11A/15A/16A State Saved Query Temperature of Last Align Now LO Leakage :CALibration:TEMPerature:INTernal:LOLeakage? Remote Command :CAL:TEMP:INT:LOL?
Page 518 4 System 4.6 Alignments :CAL:TIME:INT:RRH:LOS? Example Notes Value in hours since the last successful Align LO Clock Dependencies Only appears in VXT based solutions with M1741A/42A/49A/49B RRH State Saved :CALibration:TIME:INTernal:LOSync? Backwards Compatibility SCPI Query Temperature of Last Align LO Clock :CALibration:TEMPerature:INTernal:RRHead:LOSync? Remote Command :CAL:TEMP:INT:RRH:LOS?
Page 519 4 System 4.6 Alignments Query Time since Last Align Fast RRH Amplitude :CALibration:TIME:INTernal:RRHead:AMPLitude:FAST? Remote Command :CAL:TIME:INT:RRH:AMPL:FAST? Example Notes Value in hours since the last successful Align Fast RRH Amplitude Dependencies Only appears in VXT based solutions with M1742A RRH State Saved Query Temperature of Last Align Fast RRH Amplitude :CALibration:TEMPerature:INTernal:RRHead:AMPLitude:FAST? Remote Command...
Page 520 4 System 4.6 Alignments Query Temperature of Last Align Now RF :CALibration:TEMPerature:LRF? Remote Command :CAL:TEMP:LRF? Example Notes Value is in degrees Centigrade at which the last successful Align Now RF was executed, either individually or as a component of Align Now All State Saved Query Time since Last Align IF :CALibration:TIME:LIF?
Page 521 4 System 4.6 Alignments Dependencies In models that do not include preselectors, this command is not enabled and any attempt to set or query yields an error State Saved Query Time since Auto Align Off :CALibration:AUTO:TIME:OFF? Remote Command :CAL:AUTO:TIME:OFF? Example Notes Value is the elapsed time, in seconds, since Auto Align has been set to Off or Off with Alert.
Page 522 4 System 4.6 Alignments Query Temperature of Last Align Now 30 MHz – 3.6 MHz :CALibration:TEMPerature:RFPSelector:LRADiated? Remote Command :CAL:TEMP:RFPS:LRAD? Example Notes Value is in degrees Centigrade at which the last successful Align Now, 30 MHz – 3.6 GHz was executed State Saved Query Next Scheduled Alignment Time :CALibration:RFPSelector:SCHeduler:TIME:NEXT? Remote...
Page 523 4 System 4.6 Alignments Query Temperature of Last Align Now External Mixer Path :CALibration:TEMPerature:INTernal:EMPath? Remote Command :CAL:TEMP:INT:EMP? Example Notes Value in degrees Centigrade when the last successful Align Now External Mixer Path was executed Dependencies Only appears option MXP is installed State Saved Query Time since Last Align Now Low Band :CALibration:TIME:INTernal:LBANd?
Page 524 4 System 4.6 Alignments Query Time since Last Align VXT Transceiver :CALibration:TIME:INTernal:VXT:TRANsceiver? Remote Command :CAL:TIME:INT:VXT:TRAN? Example Notes Value in hours since the last successful Align VXT Transceiver Returns if Align VXT Transceiver has never been performed on the instrument Dependencies Only appears in M9410E/11E/15E/16E State Saved Query Temperature of Last Align VXT Transceiver...
Page 525: Timebase Dac
4 System 4.6 Alignments :CAL:TIME:PDEL:SOUR? Example Notes The value is the elapsed time in hours since the last successful Path Delay Calibration has been performed Returns NaN if the Path Delay Calibration has never been performed State Saved Query Temperature of Last Path Delay Calibration :CALibration:TEMPerature:PDELay:SOURce? Remote Command...
Page 526: User Value
4 System 4.6 Alignments USER setting sets the Timebase DAC to the value set on the User Value control. In this case the value displayed at the top of the screen is the user value. :CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:MODE CALibrated | USER Remote Command :CALibration:FREQuency:REFerence:MODE? :CAL:FREQ:REF:MODE CAL Example...
Page 527: Advanced
Presel Center is desired. Presel Center is required prior to any measurement for best (and warranted) amplitude accuracy. Keysight recommends that the Characterize Preselector operation be performed yearly as part of any calibration, but performing this operation every three months can be worthwhile.
Page 528 4 System 4.6 Alignments However, since the old characterization data is purged at the beginning of the characterization, you now have an uncharacterized preselector. You should re- execute this function and allow it to finish before making any further preselected measurements.
Page 529: Characterize Reference Clock
4 System 4.6 Alignments 4.6.6.2 Characterize Reference Clock Calibrates the Reference Input Phase with the External Reference Output. This feature is only available when either option DP2 or B40 is present. It requires connecting the 10 MHz OUT to the EXT REF IN port with a BNC cable before running the characterization.
Page 530 4 System 4.6 Alignments Notes Value is the date and time the last successful Characterize Reference Clock was executed. The date is separated from the time by a space character. Returns “” if Characterize Reference Clock has never been performed on the instrument Dependencies Option DP2 or B40 State Saved...
Page 531: Characterize Noise Floor
4 System 4.6 Alignments Step 3 of the guided calibration sequence: 4.6.6.3 Characterize Noise Floor On instruments with the NF2 license installed, the calibrated Noise Floor used by Noise Floor Extensions should be refreshed periodically. To do this, press Characterize Noise Floor. When you press this control, the instrument stops any measurement currently underway, and a dialog appears with an OK and Cancel button that says: This action will take several minutes to perform.
Page 532 Keysight recommends that the Characterize Noise Floor operation be performed when the instrument is operating at an ambient temperature that is significantly different than the ambient temperature at which this alignment was last run.
Page 533: Calibration Temperature History
4 System 4.6 Alignments Dependencies In models that do not include NF2, this command is not enabled and any attempt to set or query yields an error State Saved :CALibration:TEMPerature:NFLoor? Remote Command :CAL:TEMP:NFL? Example Notes Value is the temperature of the last successful Characterize Noise Floor was executed Returns “”...
Page 534: Tds Alignment
4 System 4.6 Alignments Temperature Seconds Ago Lets you query temperature X seconds ago. If no data exists for the requested time, the returned value is 9.91e+37. :CALibration:TEMPerature:AGO? <seconds> Remote Command :CAL:TEMP:AGO? 75 Example Oldest Temperature Value Lets you query the oldest recorded temperature value. :CALibration:TEMPerature:OLDest[:TEMPerature]? Remote Command...
Page 535: Backup Or Restore Align Data
Press OK and the instrument will shut down and open the backup utility. Alignment data for the instrument resides on the hard drive in a database. Keysight uses high quality hard drives; however, it is highly recommended the alignment data be backed-up to storage outside of the instrument.
Page 536: Alignment Data Wizard (Without Flash)
4 System 4.6 Alignments of the backup on the flash and the timestamp of the alignment data in use on the disk. If the backup on the flash has newer data, you are given the opportunity to restore the data from the backup before the application is loaded. If you respond Yes, the Backup and Restore Alignment Data wizard (see "Alignment Data Wizard (with Flash)"...
Page 537 4 System 4.6 Alignments The default backup location for instruments without internal flash will be the first drive identified as an external drive (USB or LAN) if such is available; or, if not, the internal D: partition. IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 538 4 System 4.6 Alignments The default file name is <model number>_<serial number>_<date in YYYYMMDDHHMMSS>.bkz. The default file extension for legacy backup files was .bak. The Backup and Restore operations support both the .bak (legacy format) and .bkz formats. If a USB drive is present, it will be selected by default. The path defaults to the AlignmentBackups folder, and a filename is automatically created, in the form: <model>_<serial number>_<date><time>.bkz...
Page 539 4 System 4.6 Alignments IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 540 4 System 4.6 Alignments The restore operation checks the validity of the restore file using the database's built-in file validation. If the restore file is corrupt, the existing alignment data will remain in use. If the serial number information in the backup file being restored is different from that of the instrument, the following message appears (the serial numbers shown are examples): IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 541 4 System 4.6 Alignments The default restore location for instruments without internal flash will be the first drive identified as an external drive (USB or LAN) if such is available; or, if not, the internal D: partition. The default restore file will be the most recent file that matches the default backup file name format: <model number>_<serial number>_ <date>.bkz...
Page 542 4 System 4.6 Alignments Changing the drive letter also modifies the path displayed in the box below. When this step is first loaded, the drive drop-down menu is populated with connected drives, which provide you with read access. The path defaults to the AlignBackups folder.
Page 543 4 System 4.6 Alignments IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 544 4 System 4.6 Alignments .bak When restoring data in the legacy format, Administrator privileges are required. You will be prompted when you attempt a restore (indicated by the UAC Shield on the Restore button below). IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 545: Perform Backup (Without Flash) (Remote Command Only)
4 System 4.6 Alignments Perform Backup (without Flash) (Remote Command Only) Invokes an alignment data backup operation to the provided location. Keysight recommends that the specified location should be external to the NOTE instrument (USB or Mapped Network Drive). :CALibration:DATA:BACKup <filename>...
Page 546: Alignment Data Wizard (With Flash)
4 System 4.6 Alignments Alignment Data Wizard (with Flash) If your instrument has Processor Assembly type PC6S or PC7S (see "Show System" on page 428) the instrument has an internal flash EEPROM that can store a backup of the alignment data. In this case, the interface to the Alignment Data Wizard is enhanced to accommodate this internal storage.
Page 547 4 System 4.6 Alignments Having selected Backup or Restore, you then select the source or destination for the alignment data. As shown below, you can select either: – Internal flash EEPROM, or, – External Removable Drive (which includes the SD card described in "Backup or Restore Align Data…"...
Page 548 4 System 4.6 Alignments The final page of the wizard asks you to confirm the choices made in the previous pages. When the operation is complete, an indication is displayed on the same page, as below. Backup IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 549 4 System 4.6 Alignments Restore IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 550 4 System 4.6 Alignments When restoring alignment data, if the serial number information in the backup file being restored is different from that of the instrument, the following message appears (the serial numbers shown are examples): Immediately before the actual restoration, a final confirmation message is displayed detailing what is being restored and the current database that will be overwritten on the disk (the dates and versions are examples): IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 551: Perform Backup (With Flash) (Remote Command Only)
4 System 4.6 Alignments When backing up alignment data to the flash, if there is already an existing backup on the flash, a final confirmation message is displayed detailing what is being backed up and what will be overwritten on the flash (again, the dates and versions are examples): Perform Backup (with Flash) (Remote Command Only) Invokes an alignment data backup operation to the internal flash EEPROM.
Page 552: Ogrf Preselector
4 System 4.6 Alignments Align Now All must be executed if the value of the Timebase DAC results in a change. :SYST:DEF ALIG Example Notes Alignment processing that results as the transition to Auto Align Normal will be executed sequentially; *OPC? *WAI thus...
Page 553: Align Now, 30 Mhz To 3.6 Ghz
4 System 4.6 Alignments The “Align 20 Hz to 30 MHz required” Error Condition will appear when this alignment has expired. User is now responsible to perform the Align Now, 20 Hz to 30 MHz to keep the receiver in warranted operation. This alignment can only be performed by user as it is not part of the Auto Align process.
Page 554: Align Now, 20 Hz To 3.6 Ghz
4 System 4.6 Alignments The “Align 30 MHz to 3.6 GHz required” Error Condition appears when this alignment has expired. You must now perform Align Now, 30 MHz to 3.6 GHz to keep the receiver in warrantied operation. :CALibration:RFPSelector:RADiated Remote Command :CALibration:RFPSelector:RADiated? :CAL:RFPS:RAD Example...
Page 555: Alert
4 System 4.6 Alignments The “Align 20 Hz to 3.6 GHz required” Error Condition appears when this alignment has expired.You must now perform the Align Now, 20 Hz to 3.6 GHz to keep the receiver in warrantied operation. :CALibration:RFPSelector:FULL Remote Command :CALibration:RFPSelector:FULL? :CAL:RFPS:FULL Example...
Page 556: Scheduler
4 System 4.6 Alignments 4.6.6.8 Scheduler Setting the Scheduler to triggers execution of the scheduled task based on the recurrence and time set in the scheduler since the last successful of the specific alignment. A warning condition of “RF Preselector alignment scheduler is ON” appears when the scheduler is set to ON.
Page 557: Date/Time
4 System 4.6 Alignments – Task 3 is the 20 Hz to 3.6 GHz alignment :CALibration:RFPSelector:SCHeduler:TASK T1 | T2 | T3 Remote Command :CALibration:RFPSelector:SCHeduler:TASK? :CAL:RFPS:SCH:TASK T1 Example Notes Changing the task does not reset the Scheduler time, and the alignment is based on the current scheduled configuration to occur Preset Unaffected by Preset but set to...
Page 558: Hour
4 System 4.6 Alignments Hour Lets you configure the hour for the scheduled task. The command to configure the date and time parameters of the scheduler is the same; but they each have their own front panel-control. Notes "Date/Time" on page 557 Preset Unaffected by Preset but set to Current hour and 00 by Restore Defaults >"Alignments"...
Page 559: Day
4 System 4.6 Alignments Notes New scheduled date to run the alignment task is updated when this parameter is changed State Saved Range 1-52 Lets you set the Day of the Week the scheduler will run a scheduled task. :CALibration:RFPSelector:SCHeduler:RECurrence:DAY SUN | MON | TUE | WED | THU Remote | FRI | SAT Command...
Page 560: Licensing
For any feature to be enabled, the SW Support Expiration Date of the enabling license must be greater than or equal to the software version date when that feature was first introduced. See the Keysight web site for features related to a specific software application and their required support date.
Page 561: Software Support Expiration Date
Setting up network licenses is done via the Keysight Floating License Manager (available on external Keysight web) and it has an Installation Guide that can be downloaded from that web page. IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 562: Application Licenses
4 System 4.7 Licensing 4.7.4.1 Application Licenses Application Licenses (like N9077EM0E-1NP) are automatically checked out when entering the Mode that uses them, and they are automatically checked-in when leaving that Mode. Because the server may have already checked out the last license for the application to another instrument, there is now the possibility that a mode switch will fail because a required license could not be checked out from the server.
Page 563: List Licenses Checked Out (Remote Query Only)
Keysight. As part of the borrow operation, you specify how long to borrow the license. This borrow period is in hours and can be any time up to the maximum allowed by the license.
Page 564: Borrow A License
4.7.4.6 Borrow a License Licenses are borrowed by using the Keysight License Manager 6 application. This can be launched from the System Licensing screen. Graphic The corresponding remote command is: :SYSTem:LKEY:BORRow "<feature>[,<version>]",<return date>...
Page 565: Listing Borrowed Licenses And Return A Borrowed License
In all other cases, (not borrowed, not installed, etc.) the return is an empty string 4.7.4.7 Listing Borrowed Licenses and Return a Borrowed License The Keysight License Manager 6 can also be used to see the currently borrowed licenses or return a license before the automatic return time.
Page 566: Return A Borrowed License (Remote Command Only)
4 System 4.7 Licensing N9073EM0E,2018.0831,20-Aug-2018 N9077EM0E,2018.0831,20-Aug-2018 Return a Borrowed License (Remote Command Only) :SYSTem:LKEY:BORRow:RETurn "<feature>" Remote Command :SYST:LKEY:BORR:RET "N9080EM0E" Example Dependencies When <feature> is not a valid license or when a license is not borrowed, one of the following errors is issued: –...
Page 567: Usb Portable Licenses
USB Portable licenses before the licenses can be used. Currently, an instrument can only be configured for Network or USB Portable licenses or both. – To set up USB Portable licenses, in the Keysight Floating License Manager select “Start a floating license server with a license file” and add files containing the USB Portable licenses desired –...
Page 568: Install License (Remote Command Only)
4 System 4.7 Licensing This feature is not available if Option SF1 is installed. NOTE For help on licensing, select Help in the menu bar at the top of the License Explorer window. 4.7.8 Install License (Remote Command Only) Used to add a license to the instrument. An example of such a command would be as below.
Page 569: List Licenses (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.7 Licensing 1FP”,”027253AD27F83CDA5673A9BA5F427FDA5E4F25AEB1017638211AC9F60D9C639FE53973590 9C551DE0A91” This command does not work for Transportable, Network or USB Portable NOTE licenses. :SYSTem:LKEY:DELete <"OptionInfo">,<"LicenseInfo"> Remote Command <”OptionInfo”> Notes contains the feature and the version. You must specify the feature but can omit the version. If you omit the version, the system regards it as the latest one, if more than one version is installed <”LicenseInfo”>...
Page 570: Validate License (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.7 Licensing 4.7.11 Validate License (Remote Query Only) Lets you query whether a particular license is currently valid. :SYSTem:LKEY? <"OptionInfo"> Remote Command :SYST:LKEY? "N9073A-1FP" Example Notes <”OptionInfo”> contains the feature and the version. You must specify the feature but can omit the version.
Page 571: Security
Dependencies Grayed-out unless the current user has Administrator privileges Preset Unaffected by Preset or any "Restore Defaults" on page 480. A Keysight Recovery sets the USB to write protect State Saved Range Read-Write | Read only 4.8.2 Restore Security Defaults Sets USB Read/Write to Enable.
Page 572: Diagnostics
This is a separate application that helps maintain your instrument at peak performance. You can set the cal interval, configure cal due reminders, check the cal status, view cal certificates and test reports, and contact Keysight for a cal service. The embedded help documentation can be accessed in the instrument at: C:\Program Files\Keysight\Calibration Advisor\PCA.chm, or via the ? button at the...
Page 573: Query The Operating Temperature Extremes (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.9 Diagnostics “<Cal Signal>,<AC/DC>,<2dB #1 Atten>,<2dB #2 Atten>,<6dB Atten>,<10dB Atten>,<20dB Atten>,<30dB Atten>,<Fixed Atten>,<Low Noise Path Switch>,<Presel Bypass>” Items in the list not pertaining to your hardware configuration return as -999 for those items Dependencies Not supported by E6607C 4.9.4 Query the Operating Temperature Extremes (Remote Query Only) Returns the low operating temperature extreme value.
Page 574: Service
4 System 4.10 Service 4.10 Service Accesses capabilities performed in the factory or under instructions from repair procedures. This key is only visible when the logged-in user is “advanceduser” or “saservice”. The first access to the Service menu after invoking the instrument application will require an authentication Service Code.
Page 575: Scpi Recorder
4 System 4.11 SCPI Recorder 4.11 SCPI Recorder Allows you to view active recording content, and edit the content. Right-click or touch and hold on any UI control to display a menu allowing you to record the SCPI associated with the control. Selecting this tab displays the Recorder dialog on the right.
Page 576: Recording Limit
4 System 4.11 SCPI Recorder and recording will be stopped, unless the recording limit is increased. To maintain the integrity of recording, stop recording before sending remote NOTE commands to the instrument. Changes made to the instrument via remote SCPI are not recorded.
Page 577: Copy
4 System 4.11 SCPI Recorder 4.11.5 Copy Copies the SCPI column data to the system clipboard, to make it available for Paste operations. 4.11.6 Insert *OPC? Below Certain queries and commands must be sent during instrument programming, but there is no corresponding user-interface control for these commands. This control allows you to insert one such query: *OPC? below the selected row.
Page 578: System Remote Commands (Remote Commands Only)
4 System 4.12 System Remote Commands (Remote Commands Only) 4.12 System Remote Commands (Remote Commands Only) These commands have no front-panel key equivalent. – "List installed Options (Remote Query Only)" on page 578 – "Lock the Front-panel keys (Remote Command Only)" on page 579 –...
Page 579: Lock The Front-Panel Keys (Remote Command Only)
4 System 4.12 System Remote Commands (Remote Commands Only) 4.12.2 Lock the Front-panel keys (Remote Command Only) Disables the instrument keyboard to prevent local input when the instrument is controlled remotely. Annunciation showing a “K” for KLOCk (keyboard lock) alerts KLOCk the local user that the keyboard is locked.
Page 580 4 System 4.12 System Remote Commands (Remote Commands Only) As soon as you do this, the computer is locked. The initial login screen appears; no- one can access the computer at that point unless they have an account and know the account’s password.
Page 581: List Scpi Commands (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.12 System Remote Commands (Remote Commands Only) "LockWorkStation - Failed to initiate function" See also "Local Button" on page :SYSTem:LWSTation Remote Command :SYST:LWST Example Notes The lock remains in effect until a user logs in State Saved 4.12.4 List SCPI Commands (Remote Query Only) Outputs a list of the valid SCPI commands for the currently selected Mode.
Page 582: Scpi Activity History (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.12 System Remote Commands (Remote Commands Only) 4.12.6 SCPI activity history (Remote Query only) Instrument remote operation usage via SCPI can be monitored using :SYSTem:METRics:SCPI?. The monitoring occurs for SCPI control from any I/O channel (GPIB, USB, or LAN). The information of the usage pertains to the activity since the instrument application was started;...
Page 583: Scpi Version Query (Remote Query Only)
4 System 4.12 System Remote Commands (Remote Commands Only) 4.12.8 SCPI Version Query (Remote Query Only) Returns the SCPI version number with which the instrument complies. The SCPI industry standard changes regularly. This command indicates the version used when the instrument SCPI commands were defined. :SYSTem:VERSion? Remote Command :SYST:VERS?
Page 584: Input Overload Enable (Remote Command Only)
4 System 4.12 System Remote Commands (Remote Commands Only) 4.12.11 Input Overload Enable (Remote Command Only) Input Overload errors are reported using the Input Overload status bit (bit 12 in the Measurement Integrity Status Register). Input Overloads (for example, ADC Overload errors) can come and go with great frequency, generating many error events (for example, for signals just on the verge of overload), and so are not put into the SCPI error queue by default.
Page 585: Preset
X-Series Signal Analyzers IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference 5 Preset The Preset functions can be accessed in two ways: – By pressing the Mode Preset or User Preset front panel keys: – From the menu "Preset Dropdown" on page 588, which appears when you press the green Preset icon (in the upper right corner of the display): Types of Preset...
Page 586 5 Preset Type Of Preset SCPI Command Scope of Preset Front Panel Access Defaults" on page all measurements in the Mode, Dropdown" on affects all parameters in the Mode, page 588 but does not affect Input/Output or System variables Does not preset the RF Source. :SYSTem:DEFault MODes "Restore Defaults Affects all parameters in all Modes,...
Page 587 5 Preset Type Of Preset SCPI Command Scope of Preset Front Panel Access Interface Defaults" Interface” group Defaults on page 465 Does not preset the RF Source User Interface tabs :SYSTem:DEFault PON "Restore Power Affects all variables in the ”Power On” System >...
Page 588: Preset Dropdown
5 Preset 5.1 Preset Dropdown 5.1 Preset Dropdown The Preset dropdown contains the following controls. In the image below, click a control for details of that control. IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 589: Mode Preset
5 Preset 5.2 Mode Preset 5.2 Mode Preset Returns the current Mode to a known state. Mode Presetonly presets the current Screen; it does not affect any other Screens. Mode Preset also presets the RF Source. In this sense, it is equivalent to pressing Source Preset on the Input/Output, RF Source menu panel.
Page 590 5 Preset 5.2 Mode Preset Backwards In X-Series, the legacy “Factory Preset” has been replaced by Mode Preset, which only presets the Compatibility currently active Mode, not the entire instrument. In X-Series, you preset the entire instrument by Notes using System, Restore System Defaults All, which behaves essentially the same way as restore System Defaults did in ESA and PSA There is also no “Preset Type”...
Page 591: Restore Mode Defaults
5 Preset 5.3 Restore Mode Defaults 5.3 Restore Mode Defaults Most settings within a Mode are affected by "Mode Preset" on page 589, but some Mode settings are unaffected (for example, Noise Floor Extensions, Limit Line data, reference marker numbers, etc.) Restore Mode Defaults resets all these additional settings, as well as all the Mode Preset settings, except the RF Source.
Page 592: Input/Output Preset
5 Preset 5.4 Input/Output Preset 5.4 Input/Output Preset Resets the group of settings and data associated with the Input/Output front-panel key to their default values. These settings are not affected by "Mode Preset" on page 589, because they are generally associated with connections to the instrument, which generally should remain unaltered.
Page 593: Full Mode Preset
5 Preset 5.5 Full Mode Preset 5.5 Full Mode Preset Same as performing "Mode Preset" on page 589, "Restore Mode Defaults" on page 591, and "Input/Output Preset" on page 592. Essentially a factory preset of the current Mode. When Full Mode Preset is selected, a message appears saying: This will reset all of the current Mode’s variables and all of the Input/Output variables to their default state, including Input and Output selection and settings, Amplitude Correction, Frequency Reference and RF Source settings.
Page 594: User Preset
5 Preset 5.6 User Preset 5.6 User Preset Recalls a state previously saved using "Save User Preset" on page 596. You can save a User Preset state for each Mode, allowing you to define your own favorite state for each Mode and recall it at the touch of a single button. User Preset can be executed by pressing the User Preset front panel key, or from the "Preset Dropdown"...
Page 595 5 Preset 5.6 User Preset In X-Series, “state” always includes all of this data; so whenever state is loaded, or User Preset is executed, all the traces, limit lines and corrections are affected In ESA and PSA, User Preset affected the entire instrument’s state. In X-Series, User Preset only recalls the state for the active Mode.
Page 596: Save User Preset
5 Preset 5.7 Save User Preset 5.7 Save User Preset Saves the state of the currently active Mode in a unique location, for recall by the "User Preset" on page 594. Each Mode has one such location, so, for each Mode, one User Preset can be defined.
Page 597: User Preset All Modes
5 Preset 5.8 User Preset All Modes 5.8 User Preset All Modes Recalls all the User Preset files for each Mode, switches to the Power-on Mode, and activates the saved measurement from the Power-on Mode User Preset file. User Preset All Modes can be executed from the "Preset Dropdown"...
Page 598: Restore Defaults All Modes
5 Preset 5.9 Restore Defaults All Modes 5.9 Restore Defaults All Modes Resets all Modes in the current Screen back to their default states, just as Restore Mode Defaults does, switches the current Screen to the Power-on Mode, and causes the default measurement for the Power On Mode to be active in the current Screen.
Page 599: User Preset All Screens
5 Preset 5.10 User Preset All Screens 5.10 User Preset All Screens Recalls a screen configuration previously saved using "Save User Preset All Screens" on page 600. The complete configuration of all Screens is loaded, including the state of each Screen. Because User Preset All Screens performs a Recall State as part of its function, it affects all variables that are normally only reset by "Restore Mode Defaults"...
Page 600: Save User Preset All Screens
5 Preset 5.11 Save User Preset All Screens 5.11 Save User Preset All Screens Saves the current Screen Configuration in a unique location, for recall by "User Preset All Screens" on page 599. Save User Preset All Screens can be executed from the "Preset Dropdown"...
Page 601: Restore Screen Defaults
5 Preset 5.12 Restore Screen Defaults 5.12 Restore Screen Defaults Resets the Screen configuration to the factory default; deleting all screens, all screen names, all screen states, and setting "Multiscreen" on page 137 to Off. A single screen will remain, set to the Power-on Mode, in a preset state with the default screen name.
Page 602: Preset Type (Remote Command Only)
5 Preset 5.13 Preset Type (Remote Command Only) 5.13 Preset Type (Remote Command Only) :SYSTem:PRESet:TYPE FACTory | MODE | USER Remote Command :SYSTem:PRESet:TYPE? :SYST:PRES:TYPE FACT Example Notes Supported for backwards compatibility only. It is a no-op, which does not change the behavior of any preset operation Preset Unaffected by Preset, but set to...
Page 603: Restart Instrument (Shutdown)
5 Preset 5.14 Restart Instrument (Shutdown) 5.14 Restart Instrument (Shutdown) Shuts down the instrument, then reboots it. :SYSTem:PUP Remote Command :SYST:PUP Example IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 604: Restart Application (Application Shutdown)
5 Preset 5.15 Restart Application (Application Shutdown) 5.15 Restart Application (Application Shutdown) Restarts the instrument application without rebooting the instrument. Before you send this command, make sure you have saved any trace or measurement data that you want to preserve. :SYSTem:PUP:PROCess Remote Command...
Page 605: System Log Off (Remote Command Only)
5 Preset 5.16 System Log Off (Remote Command Only) 5.16 System Log Off (Remote Command Only) Provides a means to terminate all open Windows applications, and log off the current user. This is equivalent to performing the Windows command: shutdown –l –f –t0 :SYSTem:LOFF Remote Command...
Page 606: Power Standby (Instrument Shutdown)
5 Preset 5.17 Power Standby (Instrument Shutdown) 5.17 Power Standby (Instrument Shutdown) Pressing the power switch powers down the instrument. You are warned that shutting down will cause the application to lose unsaved data, and the instrument lets you respond to this warning before shutting down. The command below has the same effect, except that you can specify Normal mode (NORMal) or Forced mode(FORCe): –...
Page 607: Input/Output
X-Series Signal Analyzers IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference 6 Input/Output Accesses menus that let you control the Input/Output parameters of the instrument. In general, these are functions associated with external connections to the instrument, either to the inputs or the outputs. Input/output connections tend to be based on situation-specific hardware set up.
Page 608: Rf Source
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source 6.1 RF Source Lets you control and configure the internal RF Source. This tab only appears in models that support a built-in independent RF Source, which include E7760B, and modular products such as EXM and VXT. External Source Control and built-in Tracking Sources are controlled using the Source tab in Meas Setup.
Page 609 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source When using VXT M9410A/11A/15A/16A with Remote Radio Heads (such as the Keysight M1740A mmWave Transceiver for 5G), the choices in the dropdown menu appear as: Head h RFHD p For example, if you have two Radio Heads (numbered 1 and 2), each of which have...
Page 610: Half Duplex Output Port
Selects the Gen port on M8920A/20B Selects the T/R port on M8920A/20B RRHhRFHDp Used to select a port on a Radio Head (such as the Keysight M1740A mmWave Transceiver) as an output RRHhRFHDp corresponds to Head h, port RF Tx/Rx p. For example,...
Page 611: Rf Power
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source :HDUPlex:PORT:OUTPut RFIO3 Example :HDUPlex:PORT:OUTPut? Dependencies Only appears in EXM RFIO3 is selected as “Half Duplex Input Port”, then “Half Duplex Output Port” will be set to RFIO4 automatically RFIO4 is selected as “Half Duplex Input Port”, then “Half Duplex Output Port” will be set to RFIO3 automatically RFIO4...
Page 612 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Please refer to the "RF Power Range" on page 612 table below for the valid ranges. :SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] <ampl> Remote Command :SOURce:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude]? :SOUR:POW -100 dBm Example Notes Amplitude corrections can be specified for use with the source. In the event of amplitude corrections being applied, the valid ranges for the RF power do not change dependent on the current amplitude correction setting.
Page 613 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source VXT model M9420A RF Output Frequency Min Output Max Output Power Max Output Power Port Range Power without Option “1EA” with Option “1EA” RF Output 60 MHz ≤ f ≤ 6 –150 dBm 10 dBm 25 dBm RFHD 60 MHz ≤...
Page 614 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source VXT models M9415A/16A RF Output Frequency Min Output Max Output Power Max Output Power Port Range Power without Option “1EA” with Option “1EA” RF Output 380 MHz ≤ f ≤ –150 dBm 5 dBm 25 dBm 12.3 GHz RFHD 380 MHz ≤...
Page 615: Set Reference Power
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source M8920A/20B RF Output Frequency Min Output Max Output Power Port Range Power 100 kHz ≤ f ≤ 6 –150 dBm without option 1EA: 3 dBm with option 1EA: 15 dBm 100 kHz ≤ f ≤ 6 –150 dBm T/R port high power attenuator On: -15 T/R port high power attenuator Off: 3...
Page 616: Power Ref
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source 6.1.6.3 Power Ref Lets you toggle the state of the power reference. When you use a power reference, the signal generator outputs an RF power that is set relative to the reference power by the value entered under Source>Amplitude>RF Power as follows: Output power = reference power + entered power Where: –...
Page 617: Amptd Offset
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source :SOUR:POW:UNIT V Couplings RF Power and Power Ref units are modified by Power Unit Preset State Saved Saved in Instrument State 6.1.6.5 Amptd Offset Lets you specify the RF output power offset value. When the amplitude offset is set to zero (0) and you set a new offset value (positive or negative), the displayed amplitude value changes as follows, and the RF output power does not change: Displayed value = output power + offset value...
Page 618: Amplitude Increment
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source -200.00 dB 200.00 dB 6.1.6.6 Amplitude Increment Changes the step size for the RF Power function. Once an increment size has been selected and the RF Amplitude function is active, the step keys (and the UP|DOWN parameters for RF Power from remote commands) change the RF Power by the set value.
Page 619: Sequencer
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Once the List Sequencer has been configured using the front panel, SCPI, or by loading a tab-delimited file, the sequence must be initiated using the front panel Initiate Sequence key, or the corresponding SCPI command. Dependencies Not available in E7760B 6.1.8.1 Sequencer...
Page 620: Repetition
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source 6.1.8.3 Repetition Accesses a sub-menu to select the repetition type for the List Sequencer globally. It cannot be changed between different sequence steps. In Single, the Source list plays one time after initiation. In Continuous, the Source list plays continuously after initiation.
Page 621: Manual Trigger Now
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source :SOURce:LIST:TRIGgerout:TYPe:Marker Backwards Compatibility SCPI 6.1.8.6 Manual Trigger Now Provides a software trigger event to the List Sequencer. During execution of a sequence, if the sequencer is halted on any step that has been configured with a “Manual”...
Page 622: Insert Step Before
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Step Count Insert Step Before Inserts a new step, with default values, before the currently selected step. Inserting a step automatically increases the Step Count parameter by 1. If a sequence has already reached the upper limit of 1000 steps, then this operation is rejected, and error -221, “Setting Conflict;...
Page 623: Transition Time
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source More Information Parameter SCPI Notes Free Run Sets the trigger input for the current step to Free Run Internal Sets the trigger input for the current step to Internal Manual Sets the trigger input for the current step to Manual (Trigger Key). Any step in the (Trigger Key) sequence set to Manual will cause the sequence execution to stop until the manual trigger key is pressed.
Page 624: Band
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:TRAN:TIME? Notes SCPI is supported after A.09.40 Dependencies Not available in E7760B Preset 1.0 ms 0.0 ms 4.0 ks Band Lets you select the radio band for use in the current step. :SOURce:LIST:STEP[1]|2|…|1000:SETup:RADio:BAND <band> Remote Command where <band>...
Page 625 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Band Standard SCPI Example PCS 1900 GSM/EDGE :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND PCS1900 :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND GSM450 GSM 450 GSM/EDGE :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND GSM480 GSM 480 GSM/EDGE GSM 700 GSM/EDGE :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND GSM700 GSM 850 GSM/EDGE :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND GSM850 T-GSM 810 GSM/EDGE :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND T-GSM810 US Cell CDMA 2000 :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND USCELL US PCS...
Page 626 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Band Standard SCPI Example Band XIX W-CDMA :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BANDXIX Band 1 LTE FDD :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND1 Band 2 LTE FDD :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND2 Band 3 LTE FDD :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND3 Band 4 LTE FDD :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND4 :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND5 Band 5 LTE FDD :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND6...
Page 627 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Band Standard SCPI Example Band 34 LTE TDD :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND34 :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND35 Band 35 LTE TDD :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND36 Band 36 LTE TDD Band 37 LTE TDD :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND37 Band 38 LTE TDD :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND38 Band 39 LTE TDD :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND BAND39 Band 40...
Page 628: Device
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Band Standard SCPI Example N 66 5G NR :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND N66 N 70 5G NR :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND N70 N 71 5G NR :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND N71 N 74 5G NR :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND N74 N 75 5G NR :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND N75 :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND N76 N 76 5G NR :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:RAD:BAND N77...
Page 629: Freq/Chan
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Dependencies Not available in E7760B DOWN Preset DOWN | UP Range Freq/Chan Lets you select the frequency or channel value for the current step. If the Band selection for the current row is NONE, you enter a frequency. Otherwise, enter a channel, which causes the frequency to be automatically selected, based on the Band selection.
Page 630: Power
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Entering a Channel If the Band selection for the current row is not NONE, enter a Channel Number. This field in the table allows you to select the channel value for the current step. The frequency is selected automatically, based on the Band.
Page 631: Waveform File
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source where <string> is one of: "CW", "waveform name", "Cont", "Off" For full details of options, see "More Information" on page 631 :SOURce:LIST:STEP[1]|2|…|1000:SETup:WAVeform? :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:WAV "CW" Example :SOUR:LIST:STEP2:SET:WAV? Notes SCPI is supported after A.09.40 Dependencies Not available in E7760B For VXT models M9410A/11A/16A, if the Waveform is not Continue Previous, there is always a time gap between the current step and the previous step Preset...
Page 632: Duration Time
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source The duration can be set to be either the number of times for the ARB file associated with the sequence to play, or a specific time value, or continuous. If the step is set to play a CW tone, the step duration cannot be set to a play count.
Page 633: Play Count
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source When "Step Duration" on page 631 is Continuous Abort, this parameter specifies the maximum duration that the waveform will continue to play after a step trigger is received before the transition to the next waveform will occur. Duration is limited to a maximum of 20 seconds.
Page 634: Trig Out
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source when step duration type is Continuous on step #" is displayed If Play Count is set for the last step, the last step of ARB keeps playing as if set to Continuous after play count setting is reached Dependencies Not available in E7760B Preset...
Page 635 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source steps you have configured. For details see "Number of Steps" on page 621 If you attempt to remotely set or query a subopcode that is out of range, an error is generated Step Configuration Parameters There are 10 parameters for each step, which must be in the following order in the command: Step Trigger...
Page 636: Step Configuration Of Step Trigger Parameter List (Remote Command Only)
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Power Data Type: ampl <power> Specifies the output power for the step in dBm. For details of the valid ranges see "Power" on page 630 Waveform Data Type: string <waveform> Specifies the waveform for playback during the step. The step can output either a new ARB waveform, continue playback of the previous waveform, or output a CW tone.
Page 637: Step Configuration Of Transition Time Parameter List (Remote Command Only)
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Steps" on page 621. As a step is setup, the value entered runs through several levels of validation. :SOURce:LIST:SETup:INPut:TRIGger <enum>, <enum>, <enum>, … Remote Command :SOURce:LIST:SETup:INPut:TRIGger? :SOUR:LIST:SET:INP:TRIG IMM,INT,EXT2 Example :SOUR:LIST:SET:INP:TRIG? Notes The command is to setup below parameter array of whole list sequence Step Trigger <enum>...
Page 638: Step Configuration Of Radio Band Link Parameter List (Remote Command Only)
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source on page 621. As a step is set up, the value entered runs through several levels of validation. :SOURce:LIST:SETup:RADio:BAND <enum>, <enum>, <enum>, … Remote Command :SOURce:LIST:SETup:RADio:BAND? :SOUR:LIST:SET:RAD:BAND PGSM, EGSM, RGSM Example :SOUR:LIST:SET:RAD:BAND? Notes The command sets up the parameter array of whole list sequence Radio Band <enum>...
Page 639: Step Configuration Of Frequency/Channel Number Parameter List (Remote Command Only)
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Step Configuration of Frequency/Channel Number parameter list (Remote Command Only) Configures the Frequency or Channel Number parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time. The number of arrays is same as step number defined in "Number of Steps"...
Page 640: Step Configuration Of Waveform Parameter List (Remote Command Only)
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Power <ampl> - specifies the output power for the step in dBm. For details of the valid ranges, see "Power" on page 630 If input parameter number exceeds the step number defined by "Number of Steps" on page 621, then error -221, "Settings conflict;...
Page 641: Step Configuration Of Step Duration Parameter List (Remote Command Only)
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Step Configuration of Step Duration parameter list (Remote Command Only) Configures the Step Duration parameter array of the whole List Sequencer at one time. The number of arrays is same as step number defined in "Number of Steps"...
Page 642: Step Configuration Of Output Trigger Parameter List (Remote Command Only)
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Time or Count <time/int> - specifies time duration in seconds or play count of the ARB file associated with the step If input parameter number exceeds the step number defined by "Number of Steps" on page 621, then an error is generated, and only those parameters whose index number falls within number of steps will be updated...
Page 643: Remote Software Trigger (Remote Command Only)
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source 6.1.8.8 Remote Software Trigger (Remote command Only) During execution of a list sequence, the sequence halts and waits at any step that has Step Trigger set to “Bus”. Sending this command triggers the step and continues the sequence.
Page 644 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source numeric keypad displays the unit terminator. :SOURce:FREQuency[:CW] <freq> Remote Command :SOURce:FREQuency[:CW]? :SOUR:FREQ 1.00 GHz Example Notes Internal source has list sequence mode, which comprises of several steps that contain separate output power, frequency and waveform etc. When the source list sequence playing is complete, the last step keeps playing, and you can use this command to change the list sequence last step’s output frequency Couplings The frequency value is coupled to the current channel band and number, such that updates to the band...
Page 645 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source VXT models M9410A/11A RF Output Port Preset Min Without Option Min With Option “LFE” “LFE” RF Output 1 GHz 380 MHz 1 MHz 6 GHz RFHD 1 GHz 380 MHz 1 MHz 6 GHz VXT models M9415A/16A Freq Option Preset 1 GHz...
Page 646: Channel
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source 6.1.9.2 Channel The frequency of the source can be specified by a channel number of a given frequency band. This control allows you to specify the current channel number. For the appropriate range of channel numbers for a given frequency band, see the following tables: "GSM/EDGE Channel Number Ranges"...
Page 647 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Band Link (Device) Range Frequency (MHz) 955 £ n £ 1023 935.0 + 0.2*(n-1024) GSM 450 Uplink (MS) 256 £ n £ 293 450.6 + 0.2*(n-259) Downlink (BS) 256 £ n £ 293 460.6 + 0.2*(n-259) GSM 480 Uplink (MS) 306 £...
Page 648 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Band Link (Device) Range Frequency (MHz) Uplink 2012 ≤n ≤2338 n÷5 + 2100 2362 ≤n ≤2687 n÷5 + 2030.1 Band VIII Downlink 2937 ≤n ≤3088 n÷5 + 340 Uplink 2712 ≤n ≤2863 n÷5 + 340 Band IX Downlink 9237 ≤n ≤9387...
Page 649 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source The relation between EARFCN and the carrier frequency in MHz for the uplink is given by the following equation where F and N are given in table 5.4.4- UL_low Offs-UL 1 and N is the uplink EARFCN. + 0.1(N –...
Page 650: Radio Setup
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source LTE TDD Channel Number Ranges The carrier frequency in the uplink and downlink is designated by the E-UTRA Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number (EARFCN) in the range 0 - 65535. The relation between EARFCN and the carrier frequency in MHz for the downlink is given by the following equation, where F and N are given in table 5.4.4-1 and...
Page 651: Radio Standard/Radio Band
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Radio Standard/Radio Band Lets you select the radio standard and associated radio band. The first column in the dialog lets you set the Radio Standard; for each standard, and the second column in the dialog changes to show you the available bands. Once you have selected the radio standard, you can then set an active channel band.
Page 652 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source PCS 1900 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND PCS1900 GSM 450 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND GSM450 GSM 480 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND GSM480 GSM 700 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND GSM700 GSM 850 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND GSM850 T-GSM 810 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND T-GSM810 W-CDMA Sets WCDMA as the radio standard for use and accesses the W-CDMA specific channel band sub-menus.
Page 653 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Band 9 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND9 Band 10 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND10 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND11 Band 11 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND12 Band 12 Band 13 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND13 Band 14 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND14 Band 17 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND17 Band 18 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND18 Band 19 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND19 Band 20 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND20 Band 21...
Page 654 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Band 40 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND40 Band 41 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND41 Band 42 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND42 Band 43 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND43 Band 44 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND44 Band 45 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND45 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND BAND46 Band 46 5GNR Sets 5G NR as the radio standard for use and accesses the 5G NR specific channel band sub-menus.
Page 655: Radio Band Link
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source N 81 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND N81 N 82 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND N82 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND N83 N 83 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND N84 N 84 N 86 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND N86 N 257 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND N257 N 258 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND N258 N 260 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND N260 N 261 :SOUR:FREQ:CHAN:BAND N261 Radio Band Link Lets you specify the channel band type as either uplink or downlink link direction.
Page 656: Freq Reference
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source When you use a frequency reference, the signal generator outputs a frequency that is set relative to the reference frequency by the value entered under Source, Frequency, Frequency as follows: Output frequency = reference frequency - entered frequency Where: –...
Page 657: Freq Offset
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source For more information on Reference Frequency, see "Set Reference Frequency" on page 655. :SOURce:FREQuency:REFerence <freq> Remote Command :SOURce:FREQuency:REFerence? :SOUR:FREQ:REF 0.00 Hz Example Dependencies Unavailable, and grayed-out, when List Sequencer is Couplings The frequency reference state is coupled to the frequency reference set immediate action. When the reference set immediate action key is pressed, or the SCPI command issued, it turns the frequency reference state Preset...
Page 658: Freq Increment
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source When the frequency offset is set to a value other than zero (0) and you enter a new frequency value under Source, Frequency, Frequency, the displayed frequency will be the same as the value entered and the RF output frequency will be equal to the value entered minus the offset value as follows: Output frequency = entered frequency –...
Page 659: Rx/Tx Coupling
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Option 506 6.00 GHz For E7760B: Dependent on port selected For EXM, if license 5WC is present, the frequency range should be limited to: 1.1GHz-1.7GHz, 2.4GHz- 2.5GHz, 4.8GHz-6.0GHz. If the user-defined frequency is outside of range, reports error message “Settings conflict;...
Page 660: Rx/Tx Offset
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source 6.1.9.9 Rx/Tx Offset Lets you offset the RF Output Frequency of the source from the Center Frequency of the instrument. See "Rx/Tx Coupling" on page 659 for coupling behavior. :SOURce:FREQuency:COUPling:OFFSet <freq> Remote Command :SOURce:FREQuency:COUPling:OFFSet? :SOUR:FREQ:COUP:OFF 100 kHz Example Dependencies Grayed-out when...
Page 661: Modulation Setup
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Preset ON|OFF Range 6.1.11 Modulation Setup Allows access to the menus for setting up the available modulation types. Not available in E7760B. AM/FM/PM are not available for VXT models M9415A/16A and M9415E/16E . 6.1.11.1 AM Enables or disables amplitude modulation.
Page 662: Am Rate Increment
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source :SOURce:AM:INTernal:FREQuency <freq> Remote Command :SOURce:AM:INTernal:FREQuency? :SOUR:AM:INT:FREQ 40.0 Hz Example Dependencies Not available in E7760B Preset 400.0 Hz 10 Hz 40 kHz 6.1.11.4 AM Rate Increment Changes the step size for "AM Rate" on page 661. Once an increment size has been UP|DOWN selected and AM Rate is active, the step keys (and the parameters for AM...
Page 663: Fm Deviation
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source 6.1.11.6 FM Deviation Lets you set the frequency modulation deviation. :SOURce:FM[:DEViation] <freq> Remote Command :SOURce:FM[:DEViation]? :SOUR:FM 1.00 kHz Example Dependencies Not available in E7760B Preset 1.00 Hz 1.00 Hz 100.00 kHz 6.1.11.7 FM Rate Lets you set the internal frequency modulation rate. :SOURce:FM:INTernal:FREQuency <freq>...
Page 664: Pm Deviation
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source 6.1.11.9 PM Enables or disables phase modulation. Turning PMON when another modulation format is already on results in the previous modulation format being turned and the generation of an error. :SOURce:PM:STATe ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :SOURce:PM:STATe? :SOUR:PM:STAT OFF...
Page 665: Pm Rate Increment
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source 10 Hz 40 kHz 6.1.11.12 PM Rate Increment Changes the step size for "PM Rate" on page 664. Once an increment size has been selected and PM Rate is active, the step keys (and the UP|DOWN parameters for PM Rate from remote commands) change PM Rate by the increment value.
Page 666: Sample Rate
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Dependencies This setting is for the independent mode, and has no effect on "List Sequencer" on page 618. If Sequencer is ON, this will make the source enter List Sequencer mode, and even if ARB state is ON, the ARB file will not be played.
Page 667 1.0 GHz Option B12 1.5 GHz For VXT models M9410A/11A/15A/16A, M9410E/11E/15E/16E and E6680A/81A, the sample rate is only limited by the option, but the IF BW is limited by center frequency in addition to options. See "More Information" on page 667.
Page 668 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Center Frequency Maximum IF BW 100 kHz ~ 1 MHz (Option LFE) 50 kHz 1 MHz ~ 10 MHz (Option LFE) 500 kHz 10 MHz ~ 20 MHz (Option LFE) 5 MHz 20 MHz ~ 60 MHz (Option LFE) 10 MHz 60 MHz ~ 80 MHz (Option LFE) 20 MHz...
Page 669 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Option Maximum IF BW 40 MHz 300 MHz 600 MHz 1200 MHz Center Frequency Limitation: Center Frequency Maximum IF BW 1 MHz ~ 10 MHz (Option LFE) 500 kHz 10 MHz ~ 20 MHz (Option LFE) 5 MHz 20 MHz ~ 60 MHz (Option LFE) 10 MHz...
Page 670: Run-Time Scaling
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Center Frequency Maximum IF BW 330 MHz ~ 380 MHz (without Option LFE) (CF – 330 MHz) * 2 380 MHz ~ 550 MHz 100 MHz 550 MHz ~ 1310 MHz 200 MHz 1310 MHz ~ 2000 MHz 600 MHz 2000 MHz ~ 25.9 GHz 1200 MHz...
Page 671: Baseband Power
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Preset 0.00 Hz -50.00 MHz 50.00 MHz Baseband Power Lets you quickly control the power of the modulator prior to up-conversion to the RF carrier. :SOURce:RADio:ARB:BASeband:POWer <ampl> Remote Command :SOURce:RADio:ARB:BASeband:POWer? :SOUR:RAD:ARB:BAS:POW -10 dB Example Notes The Source Power level equals RF Power plus Baseband Power.
Page 672: Alc Hold
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source marker signal is high. For a positive polarity, this is during the marker points. For a negative polarity, this is when there are no marker points. Marker points should be set before using this function. Enabling this function without setting maker points may create a continuous low or high signal, dependent on the marker polarity.
Page 673: Trigger Type
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source with the value from the header file. The ALC Hold setting remains unchanged if the newly selected waveform does not have an associated header file Not available in E7760B, and VXT models M9410A/11A/15A/16A and M9410E/11E/15E/16E NONE | M1 | M2 | M3 | M4 Range Option Details...
Page 674: Single Trigger
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Option Details Parameter SCPI Notes FREE Free Run Sets the waveform generator to play a waveform sequence or segment continuously, without waiting for a trigger. In this mode, the waveform generator does not respond to triggers TRIGger Trigger + Run...
Page 675: Segment Advance Trigger
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Segment Advance trigger Sets the active trigger type to Segment Advance. If Segment Advance is already selected as the active trigger type, pressing this control allows access to the segment advance trigger type setup menu. Segment Advance triggering allows you to control the playback of waveform segments within a waveform sequence.
Page 676: Bus Trigger Command (Remote Command Only)
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source "Option Details" on page 676 :SOURce:RADio:ARB:TRIGger[:SOURce]? :SOUR:RAD:ARB:TRIG KEY Example KEY|BUS Notes For E7760B, the available selections are Dependencies Grayed-out if Trigger Type is Continuous, Free Run EXTernal2 Preset For E7760B: Key | Bus | External1 | External 2 | PXI Range Option Details Parameter...
Page 677: External Trigger Delay
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source :SOURce:RADio:ARB:TRIGger:SYNC[:STATe] ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :SOURce:RADio:ARB:TRIGger:SYNC[:STATe]? :SOUR:RAD:ARB:TRIG:SYNC ON Example :SOUR:RAD:ARB:TRIG:SYNC? Notes Compensates for the instrument internal latency. The negative trigger delay compensates the external latency (that is, heads and cables). See "External Trigger Delay"...
Page 678 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source :SOUR:RAD:ARB:TRIG:EXT:DEL 100ns Example :SOUR:RAD:ARB:TRIG:EXT:DEL? Notes External trigger delay time set by users will be rounded to the nearest integer multiple of the resolution EXTernal1 EXTernal2 Dependencies Unavailable and grayed-out when Trigger Source is not set to Not available in E7760B Preset 1 ms...
Page 679: External Trigger Polarity
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Note: the first PerArb trigger signal will be missed when the trigger delay is negative. External Trigger Polarity Sets the polarity of the external trigger. When POSitive is selected, trigger event NEGative happens on a rising edge of the external trigger in signal. When selected, trigger event happens on a falling edge of the external trigger in signal.
Page 680: Select Pxi Line
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Select PXI Line Controls which PXI_TRIG[0..7] backplane line is used for the trigger source. Only appears in modular analyzer products. :SOURce:RADio:ARB:TRIGger[:SOURce]:PXI:LINE <line> Remote Command :SOURce:RADio:ARB:TRIGger[:SOURce]:PXI:LINE? :SOUR:RAD:ARB:TRIG:PXI:LINE 2 Example Dependencies Unavailable and grayed-out when "Trigger Source" on page 675 is not set to Not available in E7760B Preset...
Page 681: Pxi Trigger Polarity
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Auto Function :SOURce:RADio:ARB:TRIGger[:SOURce]:PXI:DELay:STATe OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :SOURce:RADio:ARB:TRIGger[:SOURce]:PXI:DELay:STATe? :SOUR:RAD:ARB:TRIG:PXI:DEL:STAT ON Example :SOUR:RAD:ARB:TRIG:PXI:DEL:STAT? Preset PXI Trigger Polarity Sets the polarity of the PXI trigger: – When POSitive is selected, trigger event happens on a rising edge of the PXI trigger in signal –...
Page 682: I/Q Gain
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source I/Q Gain Lets you adjust the ratio of I to Q while preserving the composite, vector magnitude. Adding Gain (+x dB) to the signal increases the I component and decreases the Q component proportionally. Reducing Gain (-x dB) decreases the I component and increases the Q component proportionally.
Page 683: Rms
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Lets you directly specify current RMS value used to playback currently selected waveform. For EXM, note that an incorrect RMS value may cause inaccurate power output that is sensitive to RMS value. This setting is also updated by RMS in waveform header or updated when invoking RMS calculation operation.
Page 684: Calculate
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Option Details Parameter SCPI Notes AUTO Auto In Auto, RMS is calculated based on the whole sample range of the currently selected waveform Marker 1 Marker 1 designates the sample range for RMS calculation Marker 2 Marker 2 designates the sample range for RMS calculation Marker 3 Marker 3 designates the sample range for RMS calculation...
Page 685: Real-Time 5G Nr Compensation
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Real-Time 5G NR Compensation Phase compensation is a new concept introduced into 5G NR baseband signal generation in TS38.211 as below, to address a typical 5G scenario that Tx and Rx frequencies may not be the same. In that case, without properly compensating the phase, receiver would not be able to correctly demodulate the received signal.
Page 686: Scs
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Sets the SCS for real-time 5G NR phase compensation. :SOURce:RADio:ARB:NR5G:PHASe:SCS SCS15K | SCS30K | SCS60K | SCS60KECP | Remote SCS120K | SCS240K | SCS480K Command :SOURce:RADio:ARB:NR5G:PHASe:SCS? :SOUR:RAD:ARB:NR5G:PHAS:SCS SCS15K Example :SOUR:RAD:ARB:NR5G:PHAS:SCS? SCS30K Preset Range µ Value 15 kHz 30 kHz Normal...
Page 687: Select Waveform
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source :SOURce:RADio:ARB:NR5G:PHASe:FILTer:BANDwidth? Command :SOUR:RAD:ARB:NR5G:PHAS:FILT:BAND 99MHz Example :SOUR:RAD:ARB:NR5G:PHAS:FILT:BAND? Preset 100 MHz 10 Hz 1200 MHz Select Waveform Lets you select a waveform segment or sequence to be played by the ARB player. Presents you with a list of waveform segments files and waveform sequence files. The list of waveform segment files and waveform sequence files contains the names of all the waveform segments and waveform sequence files currently loaded into ARB playback memory.
Page 688: Segments In Arb Memory
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source does not have enough space for all the waveform segments to be loaded, an error is generated and none of the waveform segments is loaded If ARB is ON, and you attempt to play a waveform sequence but not all the waveform segments within the sequence could be found to be loaded into ARB memory, an error is generated.
Page 689: Query Arb Memory Full File List (Remote Query Only)
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source :SOURce:RADio:ARB:CATalog? Remote Command :SOUR:RAD:ARB:CAT? Example Notes The return data is in the following format: <integer> Memory used, in kB <integer> Memory free, in kB <string> … Comma-separated list of waveform segments within ARB memory Query ARB Memory Full File List (Remote Query Only) Queries the test set for the string list of waveform segments in the ARB memory.
Page 690: Segment
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Sequence” the sequence you have been building will still be there, allowing you to add or remove segments from it. Segment Shows the segment number assigned to this row. Waveform Shows the file name for the waveform inserted into this row. Use "Insert Waveform"...
Page 691: Insert Waveform
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source sequence file will be saved accordingly when save sequence… on the primary module, and the primary sequence file name should end with xxx0.seq, so the secondary module will be named according to "Naming Rule" on page 691 Waveform names in sequence files should also follow the Naming Rule Dependencies Not available in E7760B...
Page 692: Delete Segment From Arb Mem
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Delete Segment From ARB Mem This is the same as Delete Segment From ARB Mem in the Recall, Waveform dialog. Delete All From ARB Memory This is the same as Delete All From ARB Memory in the Recall, Waveform dialog. Delete Segment Lets you delete the selected segment from the waveform sequence.
Page 693 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source | M1 | M2 | M3 | M4 | M1M2 | M1M3 | M1M4 | M2M3 | M2M4 | M3M4 | M1M2M3 | Command M1M2M4 | M1M3M4 | M2M3M4 | M1M2M3M4 | ALL, \{<waveform2>, <reps>, NONE | M1 | M2 | M3 | M4 | M1M2 | M1M3 | M1M4 | M2M3 | M2M4 | M3M4 | M1M2M3 | M1M2M4 | M1M3M4 | M2M3M4 | M1M2M3M4 | ALL,\} …...
Page 694 6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source – This choice enables all four markers in the waveform segment or sequence. <waveform2> - String type. This variable specifies the name of a second existing waveform segment. The path supports MSUS (NVWFM) and real full path representation both. See example. The segment file must reside within ARB playback memory before it can be played by the ARB player.
Page 695: Edit Selected Sequence
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source If you do not specify a filename, an error is generated. If the waveform sequence file name is empty, an error is generated.If the specified waveform sequence file cannot be found, an error is generated. Edit Selected Sequence This dialog lets you edit an existing sequence of waveform segments.
Page 696: Sync Seq File
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Sync Seq File Change this setting to enable/disable the function of saving secondary modules’ waveform sequence files based on the current primary segment’s waveform settings. Remote Command "Sync Seq File" on page 690 Notes Available only on primary modules If this setting is ON, when Sync Config is not NONE, the responding secondary module’s waveform sequence file will be saved accordingly when save sequence…...
Page 697: Segments In Arb Memory
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source To load a file from the hard drive into ARB memory, go to the Recall, Waveform NOTE dialog Segments in ARB Memory This table shows you which files are loaded into the ARB memory and lets you select a file for inclusion in the sequence.
Page 698: Replace Selected Waveform
:SYSTem:LICense[:FPACk]:WAVeform:REPLace is provided for consistency with Keysight signal sources. You can use either form If you attempt to license a waveform that is already licensed using another slot an error is generated Waveform slot number <int> is positive. If you attempt to input a slot number less than or equals 0, an error is generated For EXM, if current module is not “TRX1”...
Page 699: Clear Waveform From Slot
Notes The second form: :SYSTem:LICense[:FPACk]:WAVeform:CLEar is provided for consistency with the style of Keysight signal sources. You can use either form Waveform slot number <int> is positive. If you attempt to input a slot number less than or equal to 0, an error is generated For EXM, if current module is not “TRX1”...
Page 700: Slot Status Query (Remote Command Only)
Example :SYST:LIC:WAV:FREE? Notes The second form: :SYSTem:LICense[:FPACk]:WAVeform:FREE is provided for consistency with the style of Keysight signal sources. You can use either one Slots Used Query (Remote Query Only) Returns the number of license slots used. :SYSTem:LKEY:WAVeform:USED? Remote Command :SYSTem:LICense[:FPACk]:WAVeform:USED?
Page 701: Slot Waveform Name Query (Remote Command Only)
Notes The second form: SCPI :SYSTem:LICense[:FPACk]:WAVeform:USED is provided for consistency with the style of Keysight signal sources. You can use either form Slot Waveform Name Query (Remote Command Only) Returns the waveform name of the specified slot. :SYSTem:LKEY:WAVeform:NAME? <int> Remote Command :SYSTem:LICense[:FPACk]:WAVeform:NAME? <int>...
Page 702: Locked Waveform Name List Query (Remote Query Only)
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Only Signal Studio waveform has a unique ID, which is a positive number. User-generated waveforms have no unique ID. If no waveform is stored in the specified slot, returns “0” Locked Waveform Name List Query (Remote Query Only) Returns the waveform name list of locked.
Page 703: Header Utilities
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Header Utilities If there is currently a waveform selected for playback, this table shows you the header information for the file. You can clear the header information out or edit it and save it. Dependencies Only available if there is currently a waveform selected for playback.
Page 704: Query Selected Waveform Header Info (Remote Query Only)
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Query the waveform on the hard disk by MSUS: :MMEM:HEAD:ID? "NVWFM:test.wfm" Notes The queried waveform file can be in ARB memory, or on hard disk. If want to query ARB in ARB memory, then give out the file name directly. If want to query ARB on the hard disk, then absolute file path or MSUS should be given along with the file name.
Page 705: Trigger Initiate
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Unique ID LICSTS License Status "DESC:", "SR:", "RTS:", "RMS:", "M1P:", "M2P:", "M3P:", "M4P:", "ALCHR:", Range "RFBR:", "FOFF:", "AWGNST:", "AWGNCN:", "AWGNCBW:", "AWGNNBW:", "AWGNCRMS:", "ORP:", "UID:", "LICSTS" 6.1.12 Trigger Initiate Initiates an immediate trigger event if the trigger source (under ARB Setup) is set to KEY.
Page 706: Sync Type
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source VXT models No-Across chassis MIMO is supported when license M941xA-MMO is M9415A/16A enabled NONE|TWO|THRee|FOUR|SIX|EIGHt|DONE|DTWO|DTHR|DFOU Range Option Details Parameter SCPI Notes NONE None Sets MIMO Config type as None Sets 2x2 as MIMO Config Type. 2 models are configured to Sync THRee Sets 3x3 as MIMO Config Type.
Page 707: Sync Settings
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Options Parameter Notes This model is not listed in the Secondary module List SECondary :SOURce:SYNC:CONNected:NAME? to obtain the Primary’s name in Sync State PRIMary Sync Setup is only available for Primary 6.1.13.3 Sync Settings Grayed-out when Primary and Secondary are in Sync State. Dependencies Grayed-out when Sync Type is set to or Secondary...
Page 708: Sync Settings
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source Parameter SCPI Example Notes “Local Host” indicates that the Primary and Secondary modules share the same chassis Slot Number :SOUR:SYNC:REM:SEC2:SLOT? Indicates the slot number of available models Socket Port :SOUR:SYNC:REM:SEC2:SPOR? Indicates the socket port of available models Secondary module Shows you the models to be Secondary devices Order...
Page 709: Sync Segment 2
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source – xxx0_1.wfm for TRX1 – xxx0_2.wfm for TRX2 – xxx1_0.wfm for TRX3 – xxx1_1.wfm for TRX4 xxx1_2.wfm for TRX5 Preset ON|OFF Range Sync Segment 2 Lets you config the models in the second group of NxN+NxN MIMO. :SOURce:SYNC:SETTings:SEGMent2:ENABle ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :SOURce:SYNC:SETTings:SEGMent2:ENABle?
Page 710: Ip Address
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source IP Address Sets up the controller’s IP address of Remote Secondary models. :SOURce:SYNC:REMote:ADDRess <string> Remote Command :SOUR:SYNC:REM:ADDR "192.168.1.2" Example Notes <string> - IP Address SCPI Socket Port Sets up the controller’s SCPI socket port of Remote Secondary models. :SOURce:SYNC:REMote:IPPort <integer>...
Page 711: Sync Runtime Settings (Remote Command Only)
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source :SOUR:SYNC:REM:ADDR:DEL Sync Runtime Settings (Remote Command Only) Lets you Sync runtime settings to the Secondary modules without restarting Sync. :SOURce:SYNC:RTSetting:STATe ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :SOURce:SYNC:RTSetting:STATe? :SOUR:SYNC:RTS:STAT ON Example :SOUR:SYNC:RTS:STAT? Notes When OFF, Sync is interrupted when changing frequency or power settings on the Primary module.
Page 712: Sync Connected (Remote Query Only)
6 Input/Output 6.1 RF Source 6.1.13.6 Sync Connected (Remote Query Only) Lets you query the state of synchronization. :SOURce:SYNC:CONNected? Remote Command :SOUR:SYNC:CONN? Example Returns: 1 when synchronization is established, 0 when synchronization is stopped 6.1.14 Source Preset Lets you preset the source settings to their default values. :SOURce:PRESet Remote Command :SOUR:PRES...
Page 713: Input
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input 6.2 Input The controls on this tab let you select and configure the instrument’s inputs. 6.2.1 Select Input Lets you choose which signal input you want to analyze: – "RF Input" on page 715 – "External Mixer" on page 715 –...
Page 714 6 Input/Output 6.2 Input [:SENSe]:FEED AREFerence Backwards Compatibility SCPI In the PSA the calibrator was one of the inputs and selected using the AREF parameter to the same :FEED command that switched the inputs. In the X-Series, it is controlled in a separate menu and [:SENSe]:FEED AREFerence overrides the input selection.
Page 715 6 Input/Output 6.2 Input :INPut:MIXer EXTernal | INTernal Backwards Compatibility :INPut:MIXer? SCPI Backwards PSA supports the following SCPI Command : Compatibility :INPut:MIXer:TYPE PRESelected | UNPReselect Notes :INPut:MIXer:TYPE? :INPut:MIXer:TYPE PXA does not support the command RF Input Selects the front-panel RF input port to be the instrument signal input. If RF is already selected, pressing this key accesses the RF input setup functions.
Page 716 DPL.26 or # DPL.313B from OML Inc., Morgan Hill, California, USA). The connection diagram for such a legacy mixer is: In addition, External Mixing in the X-Series supports the new Keysight M1970 series of Harmonic Mixers, which provide a USB connection for download of calibration data and additional control.
Page 717 6 Input/Output 6.2 Input Also available in the M197x series are the M1971 series USB Mixers, which provide additional inputs and outputs for special functionality as described below. These mixers have multiple signal paths which allow them to function in three different states: –...
Page 718 6 Input/Output 6.2 Input measurement that does not support it, the "No result; Meas invalid with Ext Mixing" error condition occurs: Mode Measurements Sig ID (Image Suppress only) Spectrum Analyzer Swept SA Harmonics Spurious Emissions Channel Power Occupied BW Spectrum Emissions Mask CCDF Burst Power List Sweep...
Page 719 The input settings (range, attenuation, skew, impedance, external gain) apply to the channels, not the individual ports. The system supports a variety of 1 MΩ input passive probes as well as the Keysight 113x Series active differential probes using the Infinimax probe interface.
Page 720 6 Input/Output 6.2 Input cannot distinguish between different probes of the same type, and it will use the data from the last calibration for that probe type on that port. When in differential mode, both the main and complementary probes are expected to be of the same type.
Page 721 6 Input/Output 6.2 Input is a complex operation. This will result in I Only data appearing as both "I" and "Q" data, the same as that signal would appear if seen through the RF input port. BBIQ is only supported in certain Modes and Measurements in the X-Series. When I/Q is selected in a measurement that does not support it, the “No Result;...
Page 722: Rf Input Port
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input INPut<1|2>:SELect AIQ | RF TRACe<1|2>:IQ:DATA:FORMat COMPatible | IQBLock | IQPair> TRACe<1|2>:IQ:DATA:MEMory? <offset samples>,<# of samples> TRACe<1|2>:IQ:DATA? TRACe<1|2>:IQ:SET <filter type>,<rbw>,<sample rate>,<trigger source>,<trigger slope>, <pretrigger samples>, <# of samples> TRACe<1|2>:IQ:SRATe 10.0kHz to 81.6MHz TRACe<1|2>:IQ[:STATe] ON | OFF The Rohde & Schwarz FMU has the following SCPI, which is not supported (these commands start/abort the probe calibration procedure, which is manually interactive from the front panel): CALibration:ABORt...
Page 723 6 Input/Output 6.2 Input "Parameters for VXT M9410A/11A/15A16A, M9410E/11E/15E/16E and M9420A Vector Transceivers" on page 725 "Parameters for VXT M9410A/11A/15A/16A and EXM when used with Radio Heads/CIU" on page 727 "Parameters for E7760B Wideband Transceiver" on page 730 "Parameters for M8920A/20B Radio Test Set" on page 731 "Parameters for UXM Wireless Test Set"...
Page 724 6 Input/Output 6.2 Input :INPut<1|2>:TYPE INPUT1 | INPUT2 Backwards Compatibility SCPI :INPut<1|2>:TYPE? Included for R&S ESU compatibility. In MXE, the INPUT1 parameter is aliased to RFIN and the INPUT2 parameter is aliased to RFIN2 Instruments with 2 Inputs In models with two inputs, the second input usually has a different maximum frequency than the first input.
Page 725 6 Input/Output 6.2 Input Disconnecting the V3050A changes the Preset back to RFIN and automatically switches the input to RFIN Preset ERFIN when V3050A is connected, otherwise RFIN Annotation Annotation in the Meas Bar reads as follows: – When input is RFIN: Input: RF –...
Page 726 6 Input/Output 6.2 Input <port> Input RFFD RFIO FD RFHD RFIO HD, Half Duplex :FEED:RF:PORT RFIN Example :FEED:RF:PORT RFFD :FEED:RF:PORT RFHD :FEED:RF:PORT NONE Notes RFIN sets the RF input to be the RF Input port, labeled RF Input RFFD sets the RF input to be the full duplex port, labeled RFIO FD. Note that Option “FDX” is required to enable this port RFHD sets the RF input to be the half duplex port, labeled Half Duplex (M9410A/11A/15A/16A) or RFIO...
Page 727 IFHD1 = DUT IF In/Out for Channel 1 When using a Remote Radio Head (RRH), such as the Keysight M1740A mmWave Transceiver for 5G, with the VXT or EXM, the choices in the dropdown are dependent on which heads are installed. For example, in the case where two...
Page 728 6 Input/Output 6.2 Input connect to the DUT IF IN port for Channel 1, and the corresponding SCPI parameter would be IFIN1. See the figure below: The following table lists the GUI parameter for each input or output on the CIU, and the SCPI parameter for the RF Input Port command ([:SENSe]:FEED[:RF]:PORT [:INPut]) and the RF Output Port command ([:SENSe]:FEED:RF:PORT:OUTPut):...
Page 729 6 Input/Output 6.2 Input Example Set the RF input to be the port labeled RF Tx/Rx 2 on Head 1: :FEED:RF:PORT RRH1RFHD2 Set the RF input to be the Channel 1 port labeled DUT IF IN on the CIU: :FEED:RF:PORT IFIN1 Notes Parameter RRHhRFHDp...
Page 730 6 Input/Output 6.2 Input Compatibility SCPI A1 is treated as RRH1RFHD1 and sets the RF input to be the port labeled RF Tx/Rx 1 on Head 1 :FEED:RF:PORT B1 B1 is treated as RRH1RFHD2 and sets the RF input to be the port labeled RF Tx/Rx 2 on Head 1 :FEED:RF:PORT IFIO2 IFIO2 is treated as IFIN1, and sets the IF input to be the port labeled “DUT IF In/Out”...
Page 731 6 Input/Output 6.2 Input – When input is A1: Input: A1 – When input is A2: Input: A2 – When input is A3: Input: A3 – When input is B1: Input: B2 – When input is B2: Input: B2 – When input is B3: Input: B3 –...
Page 732: Sa Frequency Extender Firmware Update (Front Panel Only)
Could not find HW assembly, cannot perform FW update <model number> <serial number> contain the actual numbers for the device. This is a failure that warrants investigation, so you should contact Keysight Customer Support for service. Error During Firmware Update Process IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 733: Sa Frequency Extender Cable Correction
Keysight provides several cables for purchase with the frequency extender. Typically, these are 1-, 2-, or 3-meter cables for the RF and IF connections. Keysight has characterized these cables and can correct for their loss. This control allows you to specify which cable is being used.
Page 734: Port Information (Remote Command Only)
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input [:SENSe]:HDUPlex:PORT:INPut RFIO3 | RFIO4 Remote Command :HDUPlex:PORT:INPut RFIO3 Example :HDUPlex:PORT:INPut? Dependencies Only appears in EXM RFIO3 is selected as “Half Duplex Output Port”, then “Half Duplex Input Port” will be set to RFIO4 automatically. If RFIO4 is selected as “Half Duplex Output Port”, then “Half Duplex Input Port”...
Page 735 6 Input/Output 6.2 Input When using the RF Preselector, if your measurement starts below 3.6 GHz and NOTE finishes above 3.6 GHz, the preselector bypass switch will have to switch in and out for every measurement. When this is the case, you will hear a clicking sound from the instrument and a warning message will be displayed: “Settings Alert: Mechanical switch cycling”.
Page 736: Notch Filter
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input 6.2.8 Notch Filter In some models that support the RF Preselector, such as PXE, there is also a notch filter to suppress signals in the frequency band from 2.4 GHz to 2.5 GHz. This control allows you to turn the notch filter on or off. [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RFPSelector:NFILter[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command [:SENSe]:POWer[:RF]:RFPSelector:NFILter[:STATe]?
Page 737: Rf Coupling
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input Select the 4.8 GHz amplitude reference as the signal input: :FEED:AREF REF4800 Turn the calibrator "off" (switches back to the selected input - RF or I/Q): :FEED:AREF OFF Dependencies Only appears when RF Input is selected as the Input Selecting an input (RF, Ext Mix or I/Q) turns the Calibrator OFF.
Page 738 6 Input/Output 6.2 Input :INPut:COUPling AC | DC Remote Command :INPut:COUPling? :INP:COUP DC Example Dependencies Only appears when RF Input is selected as the Input Does not appear in models that are always AC coupled. When the SCPI command to set DC coupling is sent to these models, it generates the error “Illegal parameter value;...
Page 739: Input Z Correction
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input X-Series Model Lowest Freq for meeting specs when AC Lowest Freq for meeting specs when DC coupled coupled CXA-C75 Input 2 1 MHz CXA-513/526 10 MHz 9 kHz CXA-m 10 MHz 9 kHz 10 MHz 9 kHz 10 MHz 20 Hz 10 MHz 3 Hz...
Page 740: All Screens Use Same Input
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input 6.2.12 All Screens Use Same Input If ON, then all Screens share the same Input settings. This is the default state. If OFF, then certain settings are allowed to be local to each Screen, meaning one Screen can have them set one way and another can have them set another way.
Page 741 External Mixer corrections when you are not using the External Mixer input. Keysight USB Mixers automatically supply their flatness data to the instrument, NOTE and the correction is applied internally. No correction needs be entered, and the correction does not appear in the user-accessible Corrections tables.
Page 742 However, once you unplug it, the Mixer Presets control ceases to be grayed-out, allowing you to preset to a different mixer 2. When Restore Input/Output Defaults is performed, if a Keysight USB Mixer is plugged into the instrument’s USB port, the Mixer Selection remains unchanged...
Page 743 6 Input/Output 6.2 Input 3. When recalling an instrument state, if a Keysight USB Mixer is plugged into the instrument’s USB port, and the Mixer Selection in the recalled state is for a USB Mixer that does not match the mixer currently plugged in, you will have to...
Page 744: Mixer Presets
USB Mixer W-Band Waveguide Harmonic Mixer The Keysight USB mixer essentially acts as a “remote front end” and is fully calibrated over the specified frequency range, without requiring any user interaction. This is particularly useful at high mm-wave frequencies, where cable...
Page 745 If the harmonic table has been edited, returns CUSTOM The command refreshes the USB mixer connection and automatically detects the mixer band. The query returns the following if a Keysight USB Mixer is plugged into the instrument’s USB port: USBE Keysight E-Band USB Mixer USBV...
Page 746 Preset When Restore Input/Output Defaults is performed, an “A” mixer preset is also issued (11970A band), unless a Keysight USB Mixer is plugged into the instrument’s USB port, in which case the Mixer Selection remains unchanged When using Keysight USB Mixers, if Restore All Defaults (:SYSTem:DEFault) has been performed,...
Page 747 6.2 Input 11970 Lets you preset for a model in the HP/Agilent/Keysight 11970 series. Because the X-Series has an LO range of 3.8 - 14 GHz, and older analyzers had an LO range of 3.0 - 6.8 GHz, the harmonic numbers used in the X-Series may differ from those used on older analyzers for the same mixers.
Page 748 6 Input/Output 6.2 Input Below are the 11970A presets. The 11970U and the 11970W use a single harmonic. The other three switch harmonics mid-band. Both harmonic ranges are shown in the table. None of these mixers use LO doubling. The 11970 K-band mixer and the 11974 preselected mixer series are not supported. Preset Readout on setup dialog and Range...
Page 749: Mixer Bias
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input Mixer Readout on setup dialog and menu panel Harm # RF start RF stop RF center D-band D-band Single Harmonic w/doubler F-band F-band Single Harmonic w/doubler G-band G-band Single Harmonic w/doubler J-band J-band Single Harmonic w/doubler 272.5 K-band K-band Single Harmonic w/doubler...
Page 750 6 Input/Output 6.2 Input :MIX:BIAS 0 Example :MIX:BIAS? Preset Unaffected by Preset, but set to (0) by Restore Input/Output Defaults State Saved Saved in instrument state -10 mA 10 mA Annunciation When the bias is turned on this (together with the bias polarity) is indicated in the Meas Bar with a plus or minus sign: otherwise, it reads “Off”...
Page 751: Select Vdi Ccd Correction
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input Table Type Behavior Switching or off, but it is the same for both Harmonic Numbers. You can set the initial Harmonic Number, and when it switches it decrements by two when the harmonic is negative and increments by two when the harmonic is positive For example, if you set the initial number to -6, when it switches it will go to -8.
Page 752: Delete All Vdi Ccd Corrections
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input is set to NONE. If the correction should be automatically selected, this can be done by setting the value via SCPI to Any (see "External Mixer Setup" on page 740) State Saved Saved in instrument state 6.2.13.5 Delete All VDI CCD Corrections Erases all stored VDI CCD corrections.
Page 753: Lo Doubler
State Saved Saved in instrument state 6.2.13.8 Refresh USB Mixer Connection Re-reads the USB devices and refreshes connection to Keysight USB mixers. This operation is the same as physically removing and reinserting the mixer’s USB connection. IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 754: Mixer Path
:MIX:BAND USB Example Notes When using Keysight USB Mixers, if Restore All Defaults (:SYSTem:DEFault) has been performed, either remove and reinsert the USB cable or press Refresh USB Mixer Connection 6.2.14 Mixer Path Determines which path you wish to use when using M1971 series USB mixers: –...
Page 755: User If Freq
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input Annotation In the Meas Bar, if an M1971 series Mixer is connected to the USB port of the instrument, the field Mixer Path appears and says: – Normal for Normal – 2xConv for Dual Conversion – Aux for Aux Equipment 6.2.15 User IF Freq Specifies the desired IF frequency when using the Aux Equipment path.
Page 756: Signal Id Mode
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input cancellation is performed in the background using two hidden traces, and the result displayed in Trace 1, which shows only the valid signals. When Signal ID is ON, this is indicated in the Meas Bar as Signal ID: On. The annotation is displayed in amber to alert you, because it can cause unexpected behavior if you are not aware that it is on.
Page 757: Cable If Loss
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input from the two traces is taken and placed in that point in the selected trace. The Peak detector is auto-selected to improve the image suppression effectiveness. Responses of each trace that lie on top of one another will remain and are valid signals, others are images and are suppressed.
Page 758: I/Q Path
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input The cable loss will depend on the IF frequency. The IF frequency varies depending on which IF path your measurement is using. For best accuracy, characterize your cable’s loss for the IF frequency or frequencies you will be using. IF Frequencies 10 MHz path 322.5 MHz...
Page 759 6 Input/Output 6.2 Input information displayed above 0 Hz. This results in a power reading 6.02 dB higher (for both) than would be seen with only the positive frequency voltage. Note also that, in this case the real signal may have complex modulation embedded in it, but that must be recovered by further signal processing [:SENSe]:FEED:IQ:TYPE IQ | IONLy | QONLyFor option details, see More Remote Command...
Page 760: Reference Z
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input Sets the signal input to be only the Q channel. The I channel will be ignored. The Q channel will be sent to the digital receiver block as Q+j0. The receiver's output is still complex. When the center frequency is 0 the imaginary part will always be zero, but for any other center frequency both the real and imaginary parts will be significant.
Page 761: Input Z
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input :INPut:IQ[:I]:DIFFerential OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :INPut:IQ[:I]:DIFFerential? Example Put the I channel in Differential mode: :INP:IQ:DIFF ON Put the I channel in Single Ended mode: :INP:IQ:DIFF OFF Notes When I Differential Input = On, the instrument checks for attenuation mismatches between the I and I- bar ports.
Page 762: Skew
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input :INPut[1]:IQ[:I]:IMPedance LOW | HIGH Remote Command :INPut[1]:IQ[:I]:IMPedance? Example Set the I channel input impedance to 1 MΩ: :INP:IQ:IMP HIGH Set the I channel input impedance to 50 Ω: :INP:IQ:IMP LOW HIGH Notes = 50 Ω, = 1 MΩ When IQ Path is I+jQ, the I Input Z setting must be the same as the Q Input Z setting.
Page 763: Combined Differential/Input Z (Remote Command Only)
"<ch>: <probe id>", where "<ch>" is either "I" or "Q" and "<probe id>" is the type of probe. For example, for the I Probe setup with an Keysight 1130A probe connected to the I port, the title will be "I: 1130A".
Page 764: Attenuation
Restore commands. When the probe has EEPROM identification (most newer Keysight probes have this), the calibration data is stored by probe serial number and port, so if you have two probes of the same type, the correct calibration data will be used for each.
Page 765: Offset
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input Example Set the attenuation for the current I probe type to 100.00:1: :CORR:IQ:I:ATT 20 dB Min/Max -60 dB /+80 dB Offset Some active probes have DC offset capability. When one of these probes is connected, this control will be visible. The signal is adjusted for the DC offset before entering the instrument's port.
Page 766: Clear Calibration
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input Coupling affects only the current probe type's setting and leaves all others unchanged Preset State Saved Saved with probe calibration data. Survives a power cycle and is not affected by a Preset or Restore Range DC | AC 1.7 Hz LFR1 | AC 0.14 Hz LFR2 Clear Calibration Clears the calibration data for the current port and probe.
Page 767: I/Q Isolation Calibration
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input The I/Q probe calibration creates correction data for one of the front panel I/Q channels. When the probe has EEPROM identification, the data is unique to that specific probe. When the probe does not have EEPROM identification, the data will be used for all probes of the same type.
Page 768: I/Q Isolation Calibration Time (Remote Query Only)
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input from the I Input Cal, the Q Input Cal, or the I/Q Cable Cal. Pressing Next from this dialog runs the calibration :CALibration:IQ:ISOLation Remote Command :CAL:IQ:ISOL Example Notes All front panel I/Q ports must be unconnected State Saved I/Q Isolation Calibration Time (Remote Query Only) Returns the last date and time that the I/Q Isolation Calibration was performed.
Page 769: I-Bar Port
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input Notes This returns 6 integer values: year, month, day, hour, minute, second. When no calibration has been performed, all values are 0. The value is specific to both the port and probe, so the value will change as probes are connected or disconnected I-bar Port The I-bar port calibration is performed with the probe body attached to the front...
Page 770: Differential
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input mirrored from the I channel. That way you only need to set up one channel (the I channel). The I channel values are copied to the Q channel, so at the time Q Same as I is turned off the I and Q channel setups will be identical. This does not apply to Probe settings or to parameters that are determined by the probe.
Page 771: Input Z
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input complementary port not in use) When a differential probe is not sensed and Q Same as I is On, the value set for I will be copied to Q. This key is disabled when Q Same as I is On Preset State Saved Unaffected by a Preset, but set to the default value by Restore Input/Output Defaults or Restore System...
Page 772: Skew
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input Skew Sets the skew factor for the Q channel. The skew will shift the channel's data in time. Use this to compensate for differences in the electrical lengths of the input paths due to cabling and probes. [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:Q:SKEW <seconds>...
Page 773: Offset
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input Preset Each probe type has its own default. The default for the "Unknown" probe type is 1:1 State Saved Saved with probe calibration data. Survives a power cycle and is not affected by Preset or Restore Min/Max 0.001/10000 This is an alternate form of the SCPI command that allows input as a power instead...
Page 774: Clear Calibration
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input Example Turn off low frequency rejection on the Q channel, allowing signals down to DC: :INP:COUP:Q DC Turn on low frequency rejection on the Q channel for frequencies lower than 1.7 Hz: :INP:COUP:Q LFR1 Turn on low frequency rejection on the Q channel for frequencies lower than 0.14 Hz: :INP:COUP:Q LFR2 Notes Only some probe types support Coupling.
Page 775: Q Port
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input The I/Q Isolation Calibration must be run before calibrating any port with either the I/Q Cable Calibration or I/Q Probe Calibration. See "I/Q Isolation Calibration" on page 767 Q Port The Q port calibration is performed with the probe body attached to the front panel's Q port and the probe tip connected via an adapter to the Cal Out port.
Page 776: Q-Bar Probe Calibration Time (Remote Query Only)
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input The calibration data is saved as soon as the port is calibrated and will survive power cycles. It is not reset by any preset or restore data commands State Saved Q-bar Probe Calibration Time (Remote Query Only) Return the last date and time that the I/Q Probe Calibration was performed for a specific port.
Page 777: I Port
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input pressed until the next screen is shown. For SCPI, this corresponds to the time from issuing the CAL:IQ:FLAT:I|IB|Q|QB command until the operation is complete. For example, if the prior instrument state is Cal Out = Off, Input = I+jQ, and Differential = Off, then up until the time the "Next"...
Page 778: Q Port
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input :CAL:IQ:FLAT:IBAR Example Notes The recommended procedure is to use the same BNC cable to calibrate all I/Q ports. All I/Q ports should be calibrated sequentially during the procedure The calibration data is saved as soon as the port is calibrated and will survive power cycles. It is not reset by any preset or restore data commands The I-bar port must be connected to the Cal Out port before issuing the command State Saved...
Page 779: I/Q Cable Calibration Time (Remote Query Only)
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input 6.2.22.5 I/Q Cable Calibration Time (Remote Query Only) Returns the last date and time that the I/Q Cable Calibration was performed for a specific port. :CALibration:IQ:FLATness:I|IBAR|Q|QBAR:TIME? Remote Command :CAL:IQ:FLAT:I:TIME? Example Notes Returns 6 integer values: year, month, day, hour, minute, second. When no calibration has been performed, all values are 0 Annunciation Guided Calibration, Cable Calibration, Last Calibration...
Page 780: Audio Input Ground
6 Input/Output 6.2 Input :AFIN:COUP AC Example Dependencies Only appears in Measuring Receiver Mode and Radio Test Mode In Measuring Receiver Mode, only appear in Audio Measurements, and only if Option 107 is present In Radio Test Mode, only appears in modular products, and only if an M9260A Audio Analyzer module is installed Preset 6.2.26 Audio Input Ground...
Page 781 6 Input/Output 6.2 Input This is the same as the control in the Preset dropdown, and also the same as Input/Output button in the Restore Defaults menu under System. All the variables set under the Input/Output front panel key are reset by Input/Output Preset, including Amplitude Corrections and Data (described in the Corrections section), with the exception of RF Source settings, which are unaffected.
Page 782: External Gain
6 Input/Output 6.3 External Gain 6.3 External Gain Contains controls that allow you to compensate for gain or loss in the measurement system outside the instrument. The External Gain is subtracted from the amplitude readout (or the loss is added to the amplitude readout). So, the displayed signal level represents the signal level at the output of the device-under-test, which can be the input of an external device that provides gain or loss.
Page 783 6 Input/Output 6.3 External Gain Note that the Ref Lvl Offset and Maximum Mixer Level are described in the Amplitude section. They are reset by Mode Preset. The External Preamp Gain is reset by the "Restore Input/Output Defaults" or "Restore System Defaults->All functions.
Page 784: External Gain - Ms
6 Input/Output 6.3 External Gain calibration data from the USB Preamp to measurements taken at the RF Input (on 2 input boxes, it will be considered to be in the signal path of RF Input 1; it is not supported for RF Input 2). The USB Preamplifier contains its own cal data.
Page 785: External Gain - Bts
6 Input/Output 6.3 External Gain -100 dB 100 dB Backwards Compatibility SCPI Example Set the Ext Gain value to -10 dB, and subsequently querying :LOSS will give 10 dB: :CORR:MS:LOSS 10 Set the Ext Gain value to 10 dB. Subsequently querying :LOSS will return -10 dB: :CORR:MS:LOSS -10 Notes A positive value of...
Page 786: I Ext Gain
6 Input/Output 6.3 External Gain Example Set the Ext Gain value to -10 dB, and subsequently querying :LOSS will give 10 dB: :CORR:BTS:LOSS 10 Set the Ext Gain value to 10 dB. Subsequently querying :LOSS will return -10 dB: :CORR:BTS:LOSS -10 Notes A positive value of <rel_ampl>...
Page 787: Q Ext Gain
6 Input/Output 6.3 External Gain 6.3.5 Q Ext Gain Affects the Q channel input. [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:Q:GAIN <rel_ampl> Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:IQ:Q:GAIN? Example Set the Q Ext Gain to 10 dB: :CORR:IQ:Q:GAIN 10 Set the Q Ext Gain to -10 dB (that is, a loss of 10 dB): :CORR:IQ:Q:GAIN -10 Dependencies Not available unless option BBA is installed...
Page 788: Data Source
6 Input/Output 6.4 Data Source 6.4 Data Source Contains controls that let you select the source of the data being fed to the instrument analysis engine. The ability to Save and Record files of I/Q data is an important feature of some X- Series applications, and the Data Source controls allow you to switch back and forth from actual data at the instrument input and recorded data from a File.
Page 789 6 Input/Output 6.4 Data Source How to Record and Playback I/Q Data In several Demod measurements (and certain other measurements), it is possible to record I/Q data to files on your hard drive or network, and then recall these files for subsequent playback.
Page 790 6 Input/Output 6.4 Data Source If you press the Recording tab in the Sweep menu, you will see a certain number of parameters displayed on the menu panel. Before you save a Recording, these parameters are all 0, as shown below: To save the data for the current measurement, press the Save hardkey (or the Save icon in the File panel) and press the Recording tab on the left side of the Save panel: IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 791 6 Input/Output 6.4 Data Source Then press Save As and choose the file type you would like to use for the Save (CSV, SDF, TXT, BIN, BINX). You can find details of the file formats in Save > Recording. Then press Save to save the raw I/Q data of the current measurement. After the Save, you will see that the data on the Recording panel has changed to describe the data in the file you just saved.
Page 792 6 Input/Output 6.4 Data Source Step 2: Recalling a Recording If you press the Playback tab in the Sweep menu, you will see a certain number of parameters displayed on the menu panel. Before you recall a Recording, these parameters are all 0, as shown below: IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 793 6 Input/Output 6.4 Data Source To recall a Recording, press the Recall hardkey (or the Recall icon in the File panel) and press the Recording tab on the left side of the Recall panel. Then press Recall From and choose the file you would like to recall. This will read the raw I/Q data from the specified file and feed it to the current measurement.
Page 794 6 Input/Output 6.4 Data Source Note that the Sample Rate key is grayed out if the file type you loaded contains Sample Rate information. BINX files do not include sampling rate information inside the file, so after recalling one of these file types, you will need to set the Sample Rate.
Page 795 6 Input/Output 6.4 Data Source You can also see that the control indicator on the measurement bar has an “F” in it and the playback symbol (right facing triangle) displayed: This indicates that the instrument is in Continuous Playback mode and is using data from a File.
Page 796 6 Input/Output 6.4 Data Source You can now examine data in the recorded file which you loaded. How you do this depends on whether you are in Continuous Playback mode or Single Pause mode. If you wish to return to looking at data at the instrument input, simply change the Data Source control from File back to Input.
Page 797 6 Input/Output 6.4 Data Source Once you press Restart, the invalid data indicator will disappear, as below: IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 798: Data Source
6 Input/Output 6.4 Data Source 6.4.1 Data Source Lets you select the input to the analysis engine. The following options are available: INPut Input A hardware input signal (the default). This causes the measurement to take its input data from the hardware input (for example RF, I/Q, or EXTMixer) currently selected on the Input tab under Input/Output STORed Capture...
Page 799: Current Meas -> Capture Buffer
6 Input/Output 6.4 Data Source 6.4.2 Current Meas -> Capture Buffer Stores the raw data of one measurement in the internal memory of the instrument where it can then be used by a different measurement by pressing Stored Data. When raw data is stored, then the data source selection switch automatically changes to Stored Data.
Page 800: Corrections
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections 6.5 Corrections Accesses the Corrections menu, which lets you select, turn on and off, and configure and edit Corrections. You can also select, turn on and off and configure Complex Corrections and Corrections Groups. Corrections arrays provide Amplitude Corrections, and can be entered by the user, sent over SCPI, or loaded from a file.
Page 801: Select Correction
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections and Complex Corrections arrays are reset (deleted) by Restore Input/Output Defaults. The following commands delete the correction registers: – User Preset the current mode :SYST:PRES:USER – User Preset all modes :SYST:PRES:USER ALL – Full mode preset :SYST:PRES:FULL –...
Page 802: Correction On/Off
Correction applies to whichever input is selected. If the input changes, the correction applies to the new input. When using the VXT M9410A/11A with Remote Radio Heads (such as the Keysight M1740A mmWave Transceiver for 5G), the choices in the dropdown menu appear as...
Page 803 6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections Head h RFHD p For example, if you have two Radio Heads (numbered 1 and 2), each of which have two RF half duplex ports, the choices for these ports appear as below: Head and Port Choice in dropdown SCPI parameter RRH1RFHD1...
Page 804: Correction Direction
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections Correction Port SCPI Note CINPut Current Input The correction will be applied to whichever input is currently selected in the Input menu RFIN RF Input Main RF Port Not available on EXM with hardware M9431A RFIN2 RF Input 2 Second RF Port, labeled RF Input 2 Only available on certain instruments.
Page 805: Edit Correction
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections INPut Correct the port only when the port is used as an Input OUTPut Correct the port only when the port is used as an Output BOTH Correct the port when the port is used as either an Input or an Output (or both) A port that is only an Output is always corrected as an output if the Correction is On.
Page 806: Select Correction
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections Because corrections data is always in dB, but the Y-axis of the instrument is in absolute units, it is necessary to establish a reference line for display of the Corrections data. The reference line is halfway up the display and represents 0 dB of correction.
Page 807: Amplitude
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections 1 THz 6.5.5.3 Amplitude Touching an amplitude value makes the touched row the current row and lets you edit the amplitude. -1000 dB 1000 dB 6.5.5.4 Go to Row Lets you move through the table to edit the desired point. 2000 6.5.5.5 Insert Row Below Inserts a point below the current point.
Page 808: Delete Correction
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections Dependencies If either the first or last point in the array is outside the frequency range of the current input, an error message is generated: “-221. Settings conflict; Start or Stop Freq out of range for current input settings” 6.5.5.8 Delete Correction Deletes the correction values for this set.
Page 809: Edit Correction Settings
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections 6.5.6 Edit Correction Settings Opens another menu page that lets you set certain properties of the selected correction, such as Interpolation, Transducer Unit, Description and Comment. 6.5.6.1 Select Correction Specifies the selected correction. The term "selected correction" is used throughout this document to specify which correction will be affected by the functions.
Page 810 6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections For amplitudes that lie between two user specified frequency points, we interpolate to determine the amplitude value. You may select either linear or logarithmic interpolation between the frequencies. If we interpolate on a log scale, we assume that the line between the two points is a straight line on the log scale.
Page 811: Transducer Unit
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections The correction to be used for each bucket is taken from the interpolated correction curve at the center of the bucket. 6.5.6.3 Transducer Unit For devices (like antennas) that make measurements of field strength or flux density, the correction array should contain within its values the appropriate conversion factors such that, when the data on the instrument is presented in dBµV, the display is calibrated in the appropriate units.
Page 812: Description
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections Examples The units that may be specified and what appears in the file and on the screen are shown below: Transducer SCPI Example In the On the screen (also Y Axis Unit Unit Correction file forced to) dBµV/m :CORR:CSET:ANT Antenna...
Page 813: Complex Corrections
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections :CORR:CSET1:COMM "this is a comment" Example Notes 60 chars max; may not fit on display if max chars used Preset Unaffected by Preset. Set to empty by Restore Input/Output Defaults State Saved Saved in instrument state 6.5.7 Complex Corrections This dialog is used to set up and display information about the Complex Corrections set.
Page 814: Go To Row (Select Correction)
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections 6.5.7.1 Go To Row (Select Correction) Specifies the selected complex correction. The selected correction will be identified by the blue outlined row in the dialog. The "selected complex correction" is an important concept when sending SCPI commands to the Complex Corrections system, because in each case the SCPI command is directed to the currently selected Complex Correction and that will be the Correction which is modified by the SCPI command.
Page 815: Correction On
Correction applies to whichever input is selected. If the input changes, the correction applies to the new input. When using the VXT M9410A/11A with Remote Radio Heads (such as the Keysight M1740A mmWave Transceiver for 5G), the choices in the dropdown menu will...
Page 816: Direction
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections For example, if you have two Radio Heads (numbered 1 and 2), each of which have two RF half duplex ports, the choices for these ports will appear as below: Head and Port Choice in dropdown SCPI parameter Head 1, port RF Tx/Rx 1 Head 1 RFHD 1...
Page 817: Description
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections OUTPut Correct the port only when the port is used as an Output BOTH Correct the port when the port is used as either an Input or an Output (or both) [:SENSe]:CCORrection:CSET:DIRection INPut | OUTPut | BOTH Remote Command [:SENSe]:CCORrection:CSET:DIRection? Example...
Page 818: File
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections [:SENSe]:CCORection:CSET:COMMent "text" Remote Command [:SENSe]:CCORection:CSET:COMMent? Example Firstly, select correction 4: :CCOR:CSET:SEL 4 :CCOR:CSET:COMM "this is a comment" Notes 60 chars max; may not fit on display if max chars used Preset Unaffected by Preset. Set to empty by Restore Input/Output Defaults State Saved Saved in instrument state 6.5.7.9 File...
Page 819: Set Data (Remote Command Only)
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections 6.5.7.11 Set Data (Remote Command Only) Lets you set the magnitude part of a complex correction’s data via a SCPI command. This is provided for compatibility with the similar command for standard corrections, to allow you to use Complex Corrections as an extension to standard corrections. Sending this command sets the phase part of the selected correction to 0 for all points.
Page 820: Delete All Corrections
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections Apply Corrections affects both normal Corrections and Complex Corrections. Normal Corrections are turned On and Off using the Correction switch under Select Correction: Complex Corrections are turned On and Off using the checkboxes in the Complex Corrections dialog: "Correction On/Off"...
Page 821: Correction Group On/Off
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections When this key is pressed a prompt is placed on the screen that says “Please press Enter or OK key to delete all corrections. Press ESC or Cancel to close this dialog.” The deletion is only performed if you press OK or Enter. [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:ALL:DELete Remote Command...
Page 822 6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections When running the Swept SA measurement in Spectrum Analyzer Mode, the message prompt is as below. You are given the option to resume the sweep or turn off the break. If in Continuous sweep, the sweep will resume after the break is turned off.
Page 823 6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:GROup:BReak ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command [:SENSe]:CORRection:CSET:GROup:BReak? :SENS:CORR:CSET:GRO:BR ON Example Notes When running the Frequency Scan measurement in EMI Receiver Mode, if break is turned on when a SCPI is sent to start the scan, the scan pauses when it reaches the boundary of correction group ranges.
Page 824: Reload Corrections From Files
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections 6.5.12 Reload Corrections From Files Because the Correction data for the Correction Group is loaded into memory from Correction files at the time the Group is defined, it will be necessary to reload some or all of the data if any of the files changes. This function reloads all of the correction data from all of the correction files defined in all of the ranges in the Correction Group.
Page 825: Delete Row
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections 6.5.13.3 Delete Row Deletes the currently-selected point, whether or not that point is being edited, and selects the Navigate functionality. The point following the currently-selected point (or the point preceding if there is none) will be selected. 6.5.13.4 Select File Indicate the correction files in which the specify file and remove file operations will take effect.
Page 826: Description
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state 6.5.13.8 Description Provides a description of up to 60 characters by which you can easily identify the correction group. The descriptions will be stored in the exported file and can be displayed in the active function area by selecting them as the active function, if desired to be in a saved screen dump.
Page 827: Stop Frequency
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections If you change the Start Frequency of the selected range to a value out of the correction data frequency range, an error icon appears on the status column and an Execution error is generated Preset Unaffected by Preset. Set to empty by Restore Input/Output Defaults 1 THz 6.5.13.11 Stop Frequency Touching a Stop Frequency value makes the touched row the current row and lets...
Page 828: Set (Replace) Data (Remote Command Only)
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections Min/Max Freq 0 Hz 1 THz Amptd -1000 dBm +1000 dBm 6.5.15 Set (Replace) Data (Remote Command Only) Accepts an ASCII series of alternating frequency and amplitude points, each value separated by commas. The values sent in the command totally replace all existing correction points in the specified set.
Page 829: Delete Correction Group Range (Remote Command Only)
6 Input/Output 6.5 Corrections :CORR:CSET:GRO:DATA 10000000,20000000,"myAmpcor.csv" Example myAmpcor.csv myAmpcor.csv refers to the Amplitude Correction data from the file in the default path Notes <filename> is the string containing the path of the correction files <filename2>, <filename3>, <filename4>, <filename5>, <filename6>, <filename7>, <filename8> are optional.
Page 830: Freq Ref Input
6 Input/Output 6.6 Freq Ref Input 6.6 Freq Ref Input Lets you configure the External Frequency Reference input on the rear panel. 6.6.1 Freq Ref Input Specifies the frequency reference as being the internal reference, an external reference at the rear panel input labeled EXT REF IN, a 1 pulse per second signal at the EXT REF IN input, or automatically sensing the appropriate reference.
Page 831 6 Input/Output 6.6 Freq Ref Input If you set this to External and no External Reference is sensed: Freq Ref: External (in amber, as a warning sign) When set to Pulse and a 1 pps signal is plugged in: Freq Ref: Pulse If you set this to Pulse and no Pulse Reference is sensed: Freq Ref: Pulse (in amber, as a warning sign) When set to Sense and neither a signal between 1 and 50 MHz nor a 1 pps signal is detected at the...
Page 832 6 Input/Output 6.6 Freq Ref Input Compatibility reference the instrument was using. The instrument automatically switched to the ext ref if it was Notes present [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:SOURce In PSA (which had no sensing), set the reference (INT or EXT), so again its query returned the actual routing Thus, the query is 100% backwards compatible with both instruments Backwards Compatibility Command [:SENSe]:ROSCil-...
Page 833 This can be changed in the config file “E66XXModules.config” located in the folder E:\Keysight\Instrument. For the non-controlling instance(s) the reference input types (in SCPI commands, and in the Virtual Front Panel menus) are blanked and unavailable for use.
Page 834 6 Input/Output 6.6 Freq Ref Input External The external reference is used. Pulse The internal reference continues to be the frequency reference for the instrument in that it determines the reference contribution to the phase noise, but its average frequency is adjusted to follow the 1 pps signal at the EXT REF IN input. Therefore, the instrument frequency accuracy will be dominated by the aging rate of the 1 pps signal instead of the aging rate of the internal reference, except during the time it takes to lock to a new 1 pps signal, approximately 10 minutes.
Page 835: Ext Ref Freq
6 Input/Output 6.6 Freq Ref Input 6.6.2 Ext Ref Freq This key tells the instrument the frequency of the external reference. When the external reference is in use (either because the reference has been switched to External or because the Reference has been switched to Sense and there is a valid external reference present) this information is used by the instrument to determine the internal settings needed to lock to that particular external reference signal.
Page 836: Default External Ref Freq
6 Input/Output 6.6 Freq Ref Input Model VXT models 100 MHz 100 MHz M9410E/11E/15E/16E 100 MHz 100 MHz All other models 1 MHz 100 MHz 6.6.3 Default External Ref Freq Restores the External Ref Freq to its default of 10 MHz. When you set an External Ref Freq value with the Ext Ref Freq control, that Frequency is persistent;...
Page 837: Ref Lock Bw
4 to 400 Hz offset. The Wide setting represents about a 60 Hz loop bandwidth, the Narrow setting about 15 When using an external reference with superior phase noise, Keysight recommends setting the external reference phase-locked-loop bandwidth to Wide to take advantage of that superior performance.
Page 838: Reference Oscillator On/Off (Remote Command Only)
The reference status is not saved in a state file, because Reference is a standard alone module. [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:PXIReference:SELect NONE | M9300a Remote Command [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:PXIReference:SELect? :ROSC:PXIR:SEL M9300 Example :ROSC:PXIR:SEL? Dependencies Only Keysight M9300A Frequency Reference is supported State Saved IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 839: Freq Ref In
6 Input/Output 6.6 Freq Ref Input 6.6.6.2 Freq Ref In Specifies the frequency reference as being the internal reference, an external reference at the front panel input labeled Ref In. [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:PXIReference:SOURce INTernal | EXTernal Remote Command [:SENSe]:ROSCillator:PXIReference:SOURce? :ROSC:PXIR:SOUR INT Example :ROSC:PXIR:SOUR? Dependencies Only available when Select Ref is not...
Page 840 6 Input/Output 6.6 Freq Ref Input :ROSC:PXIR:EXT:LOCK? Example Notes Returns “1” if the Freq Ref Input is External and Reference is locked. Otherwise returns “0” When the Freq Ref Input is External and Reference is unlocked, the following warning message appears in the status bar: Settings Alert;...
Page 841: Output
6 Input/Output 6.7 Output 6.7 Output Accesses controls that configure various output settings, like the frequency reference output, IF outputs and analog output. Not all measurements support all output functions. For example, the Swept SA Measurement does not support the Digital Bus function or the I/Q Cal Out function under the Output tab;...
Page 842 6 Input/Output 6.7 Output :OUTPut:ANALog:AUTO OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :OUTPut:ANALog:AUTO? :OUTP:ANAL:AUTO ON Example Preset Option Details Source SCPI Notes The Analog Output is off SVIDeo Screen Selects the analog output to be the screen video signal. In this mode, the pre-detector Video data is output to the Analog Out connector.
Page 843 Screen Video This mode is similar to the Analog Output of the HP 8566 family and the Video Out (opt 124) capability of the Keysight PSA analyzer (E444x), although there are differences in the behavior. Screen Video output changes while in FFT Sweeps, so for measurements that use...
Page 844 6 Input/Output 6.7 Output Furthermore, the PSA Option 124 hardware was unipolar, and its large range was padded to be exactly right for use as a Screen Video output. In the X-Series, the hardware is bipolar and has a wider range to accommodate the other output choices.
Page 845: Screen Video Level
6 Input/Output 6.7 Output channels. Consequently, if the user chooses an EMI Detector, there will be no Linear Video output. The output holds at its last value during an alignment and during a marker count and during retrace (after a sweep and before the next sweep starts). This function depends on optional capability;...
Page 846: Digital Bus Out
6 Input/Output 6.7 Output Dependencies Only appears if Screen Video is the selected Analog Output Preset Unaffected by Preset, but set to NORM by Restore Input/Output Defaults or Restore System Defaults- >All State Saved Saved in Input/Output State 6.7.3 Digital Bus Out Turns on the LVDS Digital Output port for outputting digital acquisition data.
Page 847 6 Input/Output 6.7 Output :OUTPut:DBUS2[:STATe] OFF | ON | 0 | 1 Remote Command :OUTPut:DBUS2[:STATe]? :OUTP:DBUS2 ON Example Notes If this command is sent while running a measurement that does not support Wideband Digital Bus, the message “Settings conflict; Feature not supported for this measurement” is displayed Dependencies Requires option RTS or control is not displayed Digital Bus Out and Wideband Digital Bus cannot both be...
Page 848 6 Input/Output 6.7 Output Connection “-“ pin # “+” pin # Stream_I[10] Stream_I[11] Stream_I[12] Stream_I[13] Stream_I[14] Stream_I[15] Stream_VALID Stream_CLK Q-Cable Connection “-“ pin # “+” pin # Stream_ALT Stream_Q[00] Stream_Q[01] Stream_Q[02] Stream_Q[03] Stream_Q[04] Stream_Q[05] Stream_Q[06] Stream_Q[07] Stream_Q[08] Stream_Q[09] Stream_Q[10] Stream_Q[11] Stream_Q[12] Stream_Q[13] Stream_Q[14]...
Page 849: Data Stream
6 Input/Output 6.7 Output Connection “-“ pin # “+” pin # Stream_MARK_1 Stream_MARK_2 Stream_I 16 bit "I" Data Stream_Q[15:0] 16 bit "Q" Data Stream_VALID Data valid, when '1' then I/Q data is valid Stream_CLK 150 MHz DDR clock Stream_MARK_1 Stream Mark Bit 1 Stream_MARK_2 Stream Mark Bit 2 Stream_ALT...
Page 850: Aux If Out
6 Input/Output 6.7 Output State Saved Saved in instrument state Range 1 kHz Square Wave | 250 kHz Square Wave | Off 6.7.7 Aux IF Out Controls the signals that appear on the SMA output on the rear panel labeled AUX IF Aux IF Out is valid for the RF Input and for the External Mixer input.
Page 851 6 Input/Output 6.7 Output Source SCPI Notes practical when the IF Bandwidth is <= 40 MHz, IF Path is <= 40 MHz, or FFT Width is <= 40 MHz LOGVideo Fast Log The 2 IF output is passed through a log amp and the log envelope of the IF signal is Video sent to the rear panel.
Page 852: Arbitrary If Freq
6 Input/Output 6.7 Output The output is off during an alignment but not during a marker count, and is not blanked during retrace (after a sweep and before the next sweep starts). 6.7.8 Arbitrary IF Freq Sets the frequency of the Arbitrary IF when "Aux IF Out"...
Page 853: If2 Out
6 Input/Output 6.7 Output For N9032B/N9042B, enabled on RF Input and on External RF Input when V3050A is attached When this switch is ON, no measurement is displayed, and the error “No result; meas invalid with Ext/Wide IF Out set to On” appears in the Status bar Preset Not affected by Mode Preset, but set to by Input/Output Preset...
Page 854: Ref Out
6 Input/Output 6.7 Output Annotation None (but error message appears when on) Status Bits/OPC STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity bit 1 is set when IF2 Out is ON. This indicates an error, dependencies because no valid data is on the screen or available via SCPI. However, the signal at the IF2 Out port is still valid given the other settings 6.7.11 REF Out Lets you toggle the state of REF Out.
Page 855 6 Input/Output 6.7 Output For VXT models M9410A/11A, controls the 4.8 GHz Out port on the front panel. Setting it outputs a 4.8 GHz reference signal. :OUTPut:ROSCillator:LO:OUTPut ON | OFF | 1 | 0 Remote Command :OUTPut:ROSCillator:LO:OUTPut? :OUTP:ROSC:LO:OUTP ON Example :OUTP:ROSC:LO:OUTP? Dependencies Only available in VXT models M9410A/11A/15A/16A and M9410E/11E/15E/16E...
Page 856: Trigger Output
6 Input/Output 6.8 Trigger Output 6.8 Trigger Output Accesses controls that configure the Trigger Output settings. 6.8.1 Trig 1 – 4 Out Selects the type of output signal that will be output from the available Trig n Out connectors, where n = 1, 2, 3, or 4. Some instruments do not support Trig 2 Out through Trig 4 Out outputs, nor their associated controls.
Page 857 6 Input/Output 6.8 Trigger Output For VXT model M9421A, Trig 2 Out is used as the Analyzer trigger output Preset Unaffected by Preset, but preset to the following values by Restore Input/Output Defaults or Restore System Defaults->All: Trigger 1 Sweeping (HSWP) Trigger 2 Gate Trigger 3...
Page 858: Trig 1 - 4 Out Polarity
6 Input/Output 6.8 Trigger Output Source SCPI Notes selected as the Point Trigger under Source, the Source Point Trigger under Trig 1 Out automatically gets selected. A similar pattern is used for the other Ext Trigger inputs; for example, when Ext Trigger 2 is selected as the Point Trigger under Source, the Source Point Trigger under Trig 2 Out automatically gets selected S1Marker Source Marker...
Page 859: Trig 1 - 4 Out Device
6 Input/Output 6.8 Trigger Output Dependencies You can only send TRIG parameters for the hardware you have; for example, you cannot send a TRIG3 parameter if your hardware does not support TRIG3. Sending the command for an output you do not have generates an error, “Hardware missing; Not available for this model number” Querying a non-existent output returns Trig 2 Out Polarity does not appear in EXM or VXT Preset...
Page 860: Src Trig Out Polarity
6 Input/Output 6.8 Trigger Output Option details Here are details of all Source PXI Trigger Output options: Source SCPI Notes Selects no signal to be output to the Source PXI backplane line S1Marker Source Selects the Trigger Output at Marker 1 in the Waveform file that is currently playing to be Marker 1 output to the Source PXI backplane line S2Marker...
Page 861: Analyzer Pxi Trig Out
6 Input/Output 6.8 Trigger Output :TRIGger:PXIE:SOURce:OUTPut:LINE 0 Example Dependencies Only appears in EXM, VXT and M941xE Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state Range [0,7] 6.8.7 Analyzer PXI Trig Out Selects the signal that will be output from Analyzer PXI Trigger Line (Backplane Trigger Line 0~3).
Page 862: Analyzer Trig Out Polarity
6 Input/Output 6.8 Trigger Output Source SCPI Notes polarity is positive, a high on the Trig Out connector represents the time the gate is configured to pass the signal Odd/Even Selects either the odd or even trace points as the signal to be output to the Analyzer PXI Trace Point backplane trigger line when performing swept spectrum analysis.
Page 863: Source Internal Trig Out Polarity
6 Input/Output 6.8 Trigger Output In some software released in 2018 and 2019, the SCPI command for this NOTE function was as below: :TRIGger:SOURce:INTernal[:SEQuence]:OUTPut S1Marker|S2Marker|S3Marker|S4Marker|OFF It was necessary to change this SCPI in release A.24.00 due to internal conflicts in the software. User code written for the A.22.xx or A.23.xx instrument software which used the old form must be rewritten to use the form below.
Page 864 6 Input/Output 6.8 Trigger Output Defaults->All State Saved Saved in instrument state IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 865: Calibration
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration 6.9 Calibration Lets you configure the Comb Calibrator. This tab only appears when an RCal license is installed. Settings associated with the Calibrator are configured here. 6.9.1 Configuration Opens the dialog shown below. This is a full screen dialog. Configuring of Cals is done using this dialog.
Page 866 6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 867: Cal Group
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration 6.9.1.1 Cal Group This is the same as "Cal Group" on page 900 in the Calibration tab. 6.9.1.2 Calibrate Checked Rows Executes the Cals within the currently selected Cal Group that have the Calibrate box checked in the RCal Configuration Table. Once selected, the following dialog box is displayed;...
Page 868: Apply Cal Group
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration If there are multiple Cals being executed in a Cal Group, this dialog advises you when each Cal is complete. It also provides the ability to abort the Execute Cal Request.If you choose to abort, calibrations that have completed use the new Cal data and update the Last Cal field.
Page 869: Copy From Cal Group
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration 6.9.1.5 Copy From Cal Group Determines the Cal Group from which existing rows are copied when using the "Copy" on page 869Group feature. :SYSTem:CALibration:CGRoup:COPY:FROM <integer> Remote Command :SYSTem:CALibration:CGRoup:COPY:FROM? :SYST:CAL:CGR:COPY:FROM 2 Example :SYST:CAL:CGR:COPY:FROM? Preset 6.9.1.6 Copy Lets you copy the settings in the Cal Group specified by the Copy From Cal Group parameter.
Page 870: Cal Input
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration 6.9.1.7 Cal Input Maps the currently selected Cal Group to a particular I/O port. This control allows any Input port (including External Mixing, the RF2 input, etc.) to be mapped to a specific Cal Group :SYSTem:CALibration:INPut RFIN | RFIN2 || EMIXer | ERFIN Remote Command "Option Details"...
Page 871: Select Calibrator
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration 6.9.1.9 Select Calibrator Selects the calibrator for the currently selected Cal Group to use for executing the calibration when multiple modules are connected. :SYSTem:CALibration:MODule:SELect NONE | RCM1 | RCM2 | RCM3 | RCM4 | RCM5 | Remote Command RCM6 | RCM7 | RCM8 | RCM9 | RCM10 :SYSTem:CALibration:MODule:SELect?
Page 872: Rcal Status
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration EXTernal Preset State Saved Saved in instrument state INTernal|EXTernal Range 6.9.1.13 RCal Status Opens a dialog that is used to provide the status of all active rows in all groups. Status can be one of the following: Calibrated, Applied, Calibration Failed or Apply Failed.
Page 873: All Rcal Status (Remote Query Only)
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration The Status dialog provides you with the group and row of a Calibration and its current state and any error details if the status is not OK. RCal Status (Remote Query Only) Returns a comma-separated list of the status of an individual row status in the format “Group”, “Row”, ‘Status’, “Details”...
Page 874: Insert Row Below
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration 6.9.1.15 Insert Row Below Adds a new row to the currently selected Cal Group, under the currently selected row in the table or after the sub opcode used in the SCPI command. The default values for each of the settings in the row is used. :SYSTem:CALibration:ROW[1]|2|…|100:INSert Remote Command :SYST:CAL:ROW2:INSert...
Page 875: Duplicate Row
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration 6.9.1.18 Duplicate Row Creates a new row the currently selected row, and populates the new row with the settings from the selected row of the currently selected Cal Group :SYSTem:CALibration:ROW[1]|2|…|100:DUPLicate Remote Command :SYST:CAL:ROW2:DUPL Example Dependencies The SCPI command is applied to the currently selected Cal Group. The subopcode is used to identify the Cal row in the Cal Group If the subopcode does not reference an existing Cal row in the Cal Group, the error message “- 221,Settings conflict;...
Page 876: Apply
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration :SYST:CAL:ROW2:CAL:STAT ON Example :SYST:CAL:ROW2:CAL:STAT? Dependencies The SCPI command is applied to the currently selected Cal Group. The subopcode is used to identify the Cal row in the Cal Group If the subopcode does not reference an existing Cal row in the Cal Group, the error message “-221, Settings conflict;...
Page 877: Last Cal
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration :SYSTem:CALibration:ROW[1]|2|…|100:NAME <string> Remote Command :SYSTem:CALibration:ROW[1]|2|…|100:NAME? :SYST:CAL:ROW2:NAM "Monday AM Cal" Example Notes 45 chars max; may not fit on display if max chars used Dependencies The SCPI command is applied to the currently selected Cal Group. The subopcode is used to identify the Cal row in the Cal Group If the subopcode does not reference an existing Cal row in the Cal Group, the error message “-221, Settings conflict;...
Page 878: Cal Type
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration 6.9.1.26 Cal Type Specifies how the calibration is to be performed on the selected Cal. Options are; – MAGNitude: A single CW tone is measured at the center of the screen for each frequency point – COMPlex: A comb signal is measured across the full IF passband at each frequency point.
Page 879: Stop Freq
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration stop frequency of the previous range is changed to the same value. Freq Step is set to 0 Hz and Freq Points is set to 1 If you change the start frequency <= min frequency of the instrument, the start frequency of the selected range is set to the minimum frequency of the instrument If you change the start frequency >= maximum frequency of the instrument, the start frequency of the selected range is set to the maximum frequency of the instrument and the stop frequency of selected...
Page 880: Freq Step
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration State Saved Saved in instrument state If Scale Type is Lin, the min Stop Frequency is changed to -79.999990 MHz Depends on the instrument maximum frequency 6.9.1.29 Freq Step Specifies the step frequency of the selected Cal. This determines the points between the start and stop frequencies to use for Calibration.
Page 881: Mech Atten Type
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration Preset 100000 6.9.1.31 Mech Atten Type Specifies the Mech Atten type to use: – STEP: Use multiple Mech Atten states determined by Mech Atten Start, Mech Atten Stop and Mech Atten Step – ALL: Use all the attenuator states –...
Page 882: Mech Atten Stop
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration The attenuation set by this control cannot be decreased below 6 dB with the knob or step keys. To get to a value below 6 dB it must be directly entered from the keypad or via SCPI. This protects from adjusting the attenuation to a dangerously small value, which can put the instrument at risk of damage to input circuitry.
Page 883: Mech Atten Step
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration 6.9.1.34 Mech Atten Step Determines the Mech Attenuation Step. This determines the points between the Mechanical Attenuation min and max to use for Calibration. :SYSTem:CALibration:ROW[1]|2|…|100:ATTenuation:STEP <rel_ampl> Remote Command :SYSTem:CALibration:ROW[1]|2|…|100:ATTenuation:STEP? :SYST:CAL:ROW2:ATT:STEP 2dB Example STEP Dependencies Disabled unless "Mech Atten Type"...
Page 884: Elec Atten Stop
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration :SYSTem:CALibration:ROW[1]|2|…|100:EATTenuation:STARt <rel_ampl> Remote Command :SYSTem:CALibration:ROW[1]|2|…|100:EATTenuation:STARt? :SYST:CAL:ROW3:EATT:STARt 0 Example Dependencies Only appears in Dual Attenuator models with an Electronic Attenuator installed and licensed. It does not appear in models with the Single Attenuator configuration, as in the single attenuator config- uration there is no “electronic attenuator”...
Page 885: Elec Atten Step
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration Calibration is > 3.6 GHz, then this parameter is grayed out If the Internal Preamp is on, meaning it is set to Low Band or Full, the electronic attenuator is unavailable, then this parameter is grayed out If either of the above is true, and if the SCPI command is sent, an error indicating that the electronic attenuator is unavailable is sent If both of the above are true, pressing the control generates error message -221, in other words, the...
Page 886: Full Range Atten Start
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration – STEP: Use multiple Full Range Atten states determined by Full Range Atten Start and Full Range Atten Stop – ALL: Use all the attenuator states :SYSTem:CALibration:ROW[1]|2|…|100:FATTenuation:TYPE STEP | ALL | Remote Command :SYSTem:CALibration:ROW[1]|2|…|100:FATTenuation:TYPE? :SYST:CAL:ROW3:FATT:TYPE STEP Example Dependencies Only appears if input RF is selected, and RF Input Port 2 is selected, and the Full Range Attenuator...
Page 887: Frequency Extender Attenuation Type
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration :SYSTem:CALibration:ROW[1]|2|…|100:FATTenuation:STOP <rel_ampl> Remote Command :SYSTem:CALibration:ROW[1]|2|…|100:FATTenuation:STOP? :SYST:CAL:ROW3:FAT:PT:STOP 10 Example Dependencies Only appears in N9041B, when the RF input is selected, and the RF Input Port is set to RF Input 2, and the Full Range Attenuator is installed Disabled unless "Full Range Atten Type"...
Page 888: Frequency Extender Attenuation Start
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration 6.9.1.43 Frequency Extender Attenuation Start Determines the first Frequency Extender Attenuator to be used in the Calibration. :SYSTem:CALibration:ROW[1]|2|…|100:FEATtenuation:STARt <rel_ampl> Remote Command :SYSTem:CALibration:ROW[1]|2|…|100:FEATtenuation:STARt? :SYST:CAL:ROW3:FEAT:STARt 0 Example Dependencies Only applies, and is only visible, when the External RF (ERFIN) input is selected Disabled unless "Frequency Extender Attenuation Type"...
Page 889: Frequency Extender Atten Step
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration 6.9.1.45 Frequency Extender Atten Step Determines the Frequency Extender Attenuation Step. This determines the points between the Frequency Extender Attenuation min and max to use for Calibration. :SYSTem:CALibration:ROW[1]|2|…|100:FEATtenuation:STEP <rel_ampl> Remote Command :SYSTem:CALibration:ROW[1]|2|…|100:FEATtenuation:STEP? :SYST:CAL:ROW2:FEAT:STEP 2dB Example Dependencies Only applies, and is only visible, when the External RF (ERFIN) input is selected The SCPI command applies to the currently selected Cal Group If the subopcode does not reference an existing Cal row in the Cal Group, the error message “-221,...
Page 890: If Gain
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration 4 GHz Depends on the hardware In cases where the path is not available but is selected via SCPI, generates error -241,”Hardware missing; Option not installed” Dependencies Path Availability requires Installation of: 25 MHz 25 MHz or wider IF Bandwidth option 40 MHz 40 MHz or wider IF Bandwidth option 85 MHz...
Page 891: Preamp
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration :SYST:CAL:ROW3:IF:GAIN ALL Example Dependencies The SCPI command applies to the current selected Cal Group If the subopcode does not reference an existing Cal row in the Cal Group, the error message “-221, Settings conflict; Subopcode does not reference an existing Cal row” is generated AUTO Preset State Saved...
Page 892: Μw Path Control
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration 6.9.1.50 µW Path Control Determines the µW Path Control to be used in the Calibration. Option SCPI Standard Path LNPath Low Noise Path MPBypass µW Presel Bypass FULL Full Bypass :SYSTem:CALibration:ROW[1]|2|…|100:POWer[:RF]:MW:PATH STD | LNPath | Remote Command MPBypass | FULL :SYSTem:CALibration:ROW[1]|2|…|100:POWer[:RF]:MW:PATH? :SYST:CAL:ROW2:POW:MW:PATH FULL...
Page 893: Phase Noise Optimization
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration State Saved Saved in instrument state AC|DC Range 6.9.1.52 Phase Noise Optimization Selects the LO (local oscillator) phase noise behavior for various desired operating conditions. For full details, see "Parameter Options & Installed Options" on page 893 below.
Page 894 6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration Option Description – In instruments without EP0 optimizes phase noise for small frequency offsets from the carrier "Best Wide- Optimizes phase noise for wide frequency offsets from the carrier offset" on page "Fast Tuning" Optimizes LO for tuning speed on page 895 –...
Page 895 6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration code compatibility across the family. Parameter 4 selects "Best Close-in" on page 894, which is usually not as good a choice as "Balanced" on page 895. Balanced :FREQ:SYNT 1 In instruments with EP0, the LO is configured for the best possible phase noise at offsets up to 600 kHz from the carrier whenever there are no significant spurs within the span observed with an on-screen carrier.
Page 896 6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration In this mode, the LO behavior compromises phase noise at many offsets from the carrier in order to allow rapid measurement throughput when changing the center frequency or span. The term "Fast Tuning" on page 895 refers to the time it takes to move the local oscillator to the start frequency and begin a sweep;...
Page 897 6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration Models with Option Conditions Selection loop local oscillator, which switches to Source Mode is set to “Tracking” a single loop for fast tuning Center frequency is < 195 kHz, or "Best Close-in" (available in PXA) on page 894 CF >= 1 MHz and Span <= 1.3 MHz and RBW <= 75 kHz All other conditions...
Page 898: Phase Noise Optimization All Option
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration – The RBW to be used in the calculations is the equivalent –3 dB bandwidth of the current RBW filter – The rules apply whether in swept spans, zero span, or FFT spans Ranges Option Option # Phase Noise Option Range No EPx Option...
Page 899: Mixing Mode
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration Couplings Coupled with "Phase Noise Optimization" on page 893. When this parameter is ON, it selects all available LO mappings, and Phase Noise Optimization parameter displays All in the Configuration table. When this parameter is OFF, the Phase Noise Optimization parameter displays its previously set value in the Configuration table Preset State Saved...
Page 900: Cal Group
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration 6.9.2 Cal Group Specifies the selected Calibration Group. You can use different Cal Groups for different external hardware configurations. The Cal Group is also an important concept when sending SCPI commands to the Calibration System, because in each case the SCPI command is directed to the currently-selected Cal Group, which is the Cal Group that is modified by the SCPI command.
Page 901: Connection
6 Input/Output 6.9 Calibration Command :SYST:CAL:CGR:APPL:AOFF Example 6.9.5 Connection Opens the Connection dialog, which provides step-by-step instructions for its use. IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference...
Page 902: Calibrator Control
6 Input/Output 6.10 Calibrator Control 6.10 Calibrator Control Lets you select a calibrator and control the calibrator settings. 6.10.1 Select Cal Source Lets you select the calibrator to control. :SYSTem:CALibration:TUNE[:SELected] NONE | REF50 | REF4800 | TUNAble | Remote Command CALOUT | RCM1 | RCM2 | RCM3 | RCM4 | RCM5 | RCM6 | RCM7 | RCM8 | RCM9 | RCM10 :SYSTem:CALibration:TUNE[:SELected]?
Page 903: Cal Frequency
6 Input/Output 6.10 Calibrator Control Preset Unaffected by Mode Preset. Set to by Restore Input/Output Defaults or Restore System Defaults- >All 6.10.3 Cal Frequency Lets you set the selected calibrator’s frequency. :SYSTem:CALibration:TUNE:FREQuency <freq> Remote Command :SYSTem:CALibration:TUNE:FREQuency? Example Set source frequency to 150 MHz: :SYST:CAL:TUNE:FREQ 150000000 Preset Unaffected by Mode Preset.
Page 904: Calibrator Reference
6 Input/Output 6.10 Calibrator Control Preset Unaffected by Mode Preset. Set to 0 Hz by Restore Input/Output Defaults or Restore System Defaults->All Min/Max Dependent on the selected calibrator 6.10.6 Calibrator Reference Determines the frequency reference type used by the RCal module of the currently selected Cal Group :SYSTem:CALibration:TUNE:REFerence INTernal | EXTernal Remote Command...
Page 905: Advanced
6 Input/Output 6.11 Advanced 6.11 Advanced 6.11.1 T/R Port High Power Attenuator Controls whether additional attenuation is added at the T/R Port. The T/R port has twoinput paths, one that provides a 16 dB attenuator, and the other that bypasses this attenuator. –...
Page 906 6 Input/Output 6.11 Advanced “CAUTION! Over temperature has been detected at the T/R Port. The input has been disconnected. Remove the signal, allow to cool & press OK” Until you press OK, the input remains disconnected, and no measurement can be made.
Page 907: Aux I/O Control
6 Input/Output 6.12 Aux I/O Control 6.12 Aux I/O Control This menu is only available with Option LSN, indicating that the LISN IO board is installed. It is used to control each of the eight control lines out of the rear panel connector independently.
Page 908: Save/Recall/Print
X-Series Signal Analyzers IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference 7 Save/Recall/Print This section describes the functions that can be accessed via the front panel Save, Quick Save, and Recall hardkeys, as well as via the controls in the front-panel folder icon, as shown below.
Page 909: Quick Save
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.1 Quick Save 7.1 Quick Save Quick Save repeats the previous Save at the touch of a single button. Whatever you saved before gets saved again to the same directory, and with a filename derived from the previous filename. You access Quick Save by pressing the Quick Save hardkey, or by pressing the folder icon at the bottom of the display and then pressing the Quick Save icon.
Page 910 7 Save/Recall/Print 7.1 Quick Save If Quick Save is pressed after startup and before any qualified Save has been performed, the Quick Save function performs a Screen Image save using the current settings for Screen Image saves (current theme, current directory), which then becomes the “last save”...
Page 911 7 Save/Recall/Print 7.1 Quick Save have been used if you had not entered your own file name. If the filename you entered ends with _dddd, where d=any digit, making it look NOTE just like an auto file name, then the next auto file name picks up where you left off with the suffix being dddd + 1.
Page 912: Recall
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.2 Recall 7.2 Recall The Recall dialog lets you recall previously saved states, traces and other items to the instrument from files on the instrument’s internal storage, from removable devices, and from directories on the network. You access the Recall dialog by pressing the Recall hardkey, or by pressing the folder icon at the bottom of the display and then pressing the Recall icon.
Page 913: Recall From File / Open
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.2 Recall center frequency is limited along with any other frequency-based settings. Since the center frequency can’t be preserved in this case, the recall limiting tries to at least preserve span to keep the measurement setup as intact as possible Note that there is no state file compatibility outside of the X-Series.
Page 914: State
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.2 Recall should be pointing at that same directory. There is one “current” directory for each data type for each Mode (not one for Save and one for Recall). The Filename field, just below the Path field, shows the filename that will be used. The File Name field is loaded with the name of the selected file.
Page 915: Recall Type
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.2 Recall In products that run multiple simultaneous instances of the X-Series Application, NOTE all instances share the same registers and file directories, so make sure you know from what instance a file or register was saved before recalling it. :MMEMory:LOAD:STATe <filename>...
Page 916: Register 1 Thru Register
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.2 Recall :MMEMory:LOAD:RTYPe ALL | ANALyzer | SOURce Remote Command :MMEM:LOAD:RTYP ALL Example Dependencies Only available in models with a built-in source, such as VXT models Preset ALL|ANALyzer|SOURce Range 7.2.2.2 Register 1 thru Register 16 Selecting any one of these register buttons causes the State to be recalled from the specified Register.
Page 917: Edit Register Names
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.2 Recall 7.2.2.3 Edit Register Names You may enter a custom name on any of the Register keys, to help you remember what you are using that state to recall. To do this, press the Name field for the register you want to rename, which brings up the onscreen alpha keyboard.
Page 918: Recall To Trace
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.2 Recall :MMEM:LOAD:TRAC:REG TRACE1,2 Notes When you perform the recall, the recalling Trace function must first verify the file is recallable in this instrument by checking instrument software version and model number, since it includes State. If everything matches, a full recall proceeds by aborting the currently running measurement, and loading the state from the saved state file to as close as possible to the context in which the save occurred.
Page 919: Edit Register Names
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.2 Recall There is one set of 16 trace+state registers in the instrument, not one set for each Mode. When trace+state is saved, the Mode it was saved from is saved with it; then when it is recalled, the instrument switches to that Mode. In products that run multiple simultaneous instances of the X-Series Application, NOTE all instances share the same registers and file directories, so make sure you...
Page 920: Measurement Data
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.2 Recall Command MyScreenConfig.screen Example Load the screen configuration from the file in the default directory: :MMEM:LOAD:SCON "myScreenConfig.screen" 7.2.5 Measurement Data Lets you specify a data type (for example, trace data) and choose a file from which to import the data.
Page 921: Limit
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.2 Recall My Documents\SA\data\traces :MMEM:LOAD:TRAC DATA TRACE2,"myTrace2.csv" Dependencies For SA measurements, a trace cannot be recalled from a trace file that was exported with traces selected A trace cannot be imported if the number of trace points in the file do not match the number of sweep points currently set for the measurement.
Page 922: Select Limit
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.2 Recall The instrument cannot mix Limits domains (X Axis Unit must be Frequency or Time for both Limits). So, when a Limits file is loaded, the instrument sets the Limits domain (X Axis Unit) to match that of the file.
Page 923: Select Correction
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.2 Recall Dependencies Only one Transducer units can be on at any given time. Note that this means that if a correction file with a Transducer Unit is loaded into a particular Correction, all other Corrections are set to that same Transducer unit Corrections are not supported by all Measurements.
Page 924: Select Complex Correction
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.2 Recall support it Errors are reported if the file is empty or missing, or if the file type does not match, or if there is a mismatch between the file type and the destination data type Couplings When a complex correction file is loaded from mass storage, it is automatically turned and Apply Corrections is set ON.
Page 925: Recall From File
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.2 Recall 7.2.10.1 Recall From File Recalls a previously saved SCPI Recorder file. For details of the SCPI Recording feature, see "SCPI Recorder" on page 575. After the file contents have been read, each of the SCPI commands or queries present in the file at the time of recall is applied to the system.
Page 926 7 Save/Recall/Print 7.2 Recall You then tap Recall From File to display the Recall Waveform dialog. The left-hand window shows the files in ARB memory. The right-hand window shows the files on the hard drive. You can select one or more waveform files in the right-hand window. Each file selected has a blue check box in it.
Page 927 7 Save/Recall/Print 7.2 Recall Type Extension Notes .wfm Waveform Keysight Signal Studio files Files .bin Binary Files Interleaved IQ data files. They could be single precision or double precision customer created files. One-byte marker may be added .csv CSV Files Comma-separated value file.
Page 928: Load Segment To Arb Memory
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.2 Recall 7.2.13.1 Load Segment to ARB Memory Loads a single segment to ARB memory. Same as pressing the Recall button with a single waveform selected. :SOURce:RADio:ARB:LOAD <string> Remote Command <string> - specifies the path name of the file to load from the HDD into ARB memory. May be a <full path + filename>, or <“NVWFM”...
Page 929: Delete Segment From Arb Mem
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.2 Recall directory to ARB memory is rejected with an error. When Include Source is No and there is insufficient free ARB memory to load all the waveforms, when the ARB memory is full, the copy ceases, and an error is generated 7.2.13.2 Delete Segment From ARB Mem Deletes a segment from ARB memory.
Page 930: Set Default Directory (Remote Command Only)
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.2 Recall 7.2.13.4 Set Default Directory (Remote Command Only) Sets the default directory for loading ARB files from SCPI. :SOURce:RADio:ARB:DEFault:DIRectory <string> Remote Command :SOURce:RADio:ARB:DEFault:DIRectory? :SOUR:RAD:ARB:DEF:DIR "D:\ArbFiles" Example :SOUR:RAD:ARB:DEF:DIR? Notes Sets the default directory to be used as a search location for waveform segments that are required to be loaded into ARB memory for playback of a waveform sequence, and as a search location for selecting waveforms using SCPI State Saved...
Page 931: Power Sensor Cal Factor
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.2 Recall <integer> Memory used <integer> Memory free <integer> File count in ARB memory <string>,<string>, … Comma-separated string list of waveform segments within <string> ARB memory Example: :SOUR:RAD:ARB:FCAT? EXT returns: 27499,2069653,3,”c2k.wfm”,”gsm.wfm”,”wcdma.wfm” 7.2.14 Power Sensor Cal Factor Selects a file to which to export the Power Sensor Cal factor data. Cal Factor files are XML files, and contain the cal factor data and header data that gives information on the power sensor.
Page 932 7 Save/Recall/Print 7.2 Recall Mode NFIGURE Parameter Name Recall Loss Comp Control Path Recall Parameter Type ImmediateAction :MMEMory:LOAD:LOSS BEFore | AFTer,<file_name> SCPI Command SCPI Example :MMEM:LOAD:LOSS BEF,"C:\LossBefore.csv" :MMEM:LOAD:LOSS AFT,"C:\LossAfter.csv" Notes Three file formats are supported: – Loss Compensation file (.csv) –...
Page 933: Save
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save 7.3 Save The Save dialog lets you save states, traces, screen images and other items from the instrument to files on the instrument’s internal storage, to removable devices, and to directories on the network. You access the dialog by pressing the Save hardkey, or by pressing the folder icon at the bottom of the display and then pressing the Save icon.
Page 934: Save To File / Save As
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save 7.3.1 Save to File / Save As For every Save type, a control appears labeled Save to File or Save As. Save to File appears for save types that also include registers (like State and Trace+State), and Save As appears for all other save types.
Page 935 7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save drive. You may also change to another Mode’s state directory by pressing the dropdown in the upper right corner labeled Mode. Once you have chosen a directory, the files in that directory whose extension matches the current data type (for example, .state or .trace) are displayed in the right-hand window of the...
Page 936: State
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save 7.3.2 State Selects a register or file for saving the state. State files contain essentially all the information required to return the instrument to the measurement and settings that were in effect at the time of the save. State files are in a proprietary binary form (for speed) and cannot be read or edited by PC software, but can be loaded back into the instrument to restore the state.
Page 937: Register 1 Thru Register
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save :MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1,<filename> Backwards Compatibility The "1" is simply ignored. The command is sequential SCPI 7.3.2.1 Register 1 thru Register 16 Selecting any one of these register buttons causes the state of the currently active Mode to be saved to the specified Register. The registers are provided for rapid saving and recalling, since you do not need to specify a filename or navigate to a file.
Page 938: Trace+State
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save The register names are stored within the state files, but they are not part of the instrument state; that is, once you have edited a register name, loading a new state will not change that register name. Another consequence of this is that the names will be persistent through a power cycle.
Page 939 7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save My Documents\<mode name>\state where <mode name> is the parameter used to select the mode with :INST:SEL (for example, BASIC for IQ Analyzer Mode). In products that run multiple simultaneous instances of the X-Series Application, NOTE all instances share the same registers and file directories, so take care not to overwrite files and/or registers from one instance that were saved by another instance.
Page 940: Save From Trace
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save Both single and double quotes are supported for any filename parameter over remote After saving to a register, that register’s menu key is updated with the date and time of the save After saving to a register, you remain in the Save Trace menu, so that you can see the Register key update.
Page 941: Register 1 Thru Register
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save 7.3.3.2 Register 1 thru Register 16 Selecting any one of these register buttons causes the specified trace(s) and the state of the currently active mode to be saved to the specified register. The registers are provided for rapid saving and recalling, since you do not need to specify a filename or navigate to a file.
Page 942: Screen Config + State
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save If you try to edit the name of an empty register, the instrument will first save the trace+state to have a file to put the name in. If you load a named state file into an instrument with older firmware, it ignores the metadata.
Page 943: Save From
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save with the subdirectory reflecting the data type and where <mode name> is the parameter used to select the Mode with :INST:SEL (for example, for Spectrum Analyzer Mode) and <measurement name> is the parameter used to select the measurement with :CONF (for example,...
Page 944: Meas Results
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save Meas Results Meas Results files contain information that describes the current state of the instrument, as detailed in Meas Result File Contents below. This command is only available in certain measurements, such as: – PowerSuite: Channel Power, OBW, ACP, Spectrum Emissions Mask, Spurious Emissions, Power Stat CCDF, Transmit Power, Monitor Spectrum, IQ Waveform –...
Page 945: Iq Waveform Meas Results File Contents
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save 60047250.51 39215.68627 1.00E-07 2.36E-05 In addition, examples of the Meas Results files are given for each data type in the Help below. :MMEMory:STORe:RESults <string> Remote Command :MMEM:STOR:RES "MeasR_0000.csv" Example Notes If the save is initiated via SCPI and the file already exists, the file will be overwritten The SCPI command exports measurement results to the file specified as the parameter in the current path.
Page 946 7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save – Firmware rev and model number – Option string – Center Frequency – Input Port – Info BW – Capture Time The data above is followed in the file by a line containing MeasResult0, MeasResult1, and MeasResult2. This line forms a header for each set of measurement results, which appear in subsequent lines.
Page 947: Iq Data (Normal)
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save 7.65E-07 7.796300857 -95.8662 -2.56E-06 -88.71658837 -97.78934 4.79E-07 -125.5631137 -101.0861 5.94E-06 -97.72218 4.71E-06 -96.72934 1.93E-06 -100.7464 4.04E-07 -99.8119 (rows continue until all data is displayed) IQ Data (Normal) Saves IQ data with the number of points defined by the formula below. :MMEMory:STORe:WAVeform:IQData "File name"...
Page 948 7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save The first four rows specify: the file type (always MeasResult); the Mode and Measurement IDs; the Firmware Revision; Instrument model number; and the installed instrument options. The following shows typical contents for these rows. Field 1 Field 2 MeasResult BASIC:SPEC...
Page 949: Iq Data (Normal)
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save Column Value Trace data containing the shape of the FFT window Trace data of the phase of the FFT versus frequency Linear spectrum trace data in Volts RMS Linear spectrum trace data in Volts RMS A set of 13 results, as listed in "Complex Spectrum Measurement"...
Page 950: Iq Save (Remote Command Only)
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save IQ Save (Remote Command Only) Saves Fast Capture Data stored following an :INIT:FCAP command. The command must specify either the WAVeform or Complex SPECtrum measurement. If the SCPI parameter does not specify a rooted path, then the specified file will be saved in the default Measurement Data directory.
Page 951 7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save :MMEMory:STORe:LIMit LLINE1 | … | LLINE6,<filename> Remote Command Example Save the 2nd Limit Line to the file myLimitLine2.csv in the current path: :MMEM:STOR:LIM LLINE2,"myLimitLine2.csv" Notes If the save is initiated via SCPI, and the file already exists, the file will be overwritten Using the drive is strongly discouraged, since it runs the risk of being overwritten during an instrument software upgrade...
Page 952 7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save The Amplitude Unit line in the limits file may contain a transducer (formerly “antenna”) factor unit, for example: Amplitude Unit=dBuV/m Transducer factor units are dBuV/m, dBuA/m, dBpT, and dBG. In this case, the unit is treated exactly as though it were dBuV, meaning that all of the limits are interpreted to have units of dBuV.
Page 953 7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save the description text will be used as the limit line description in the GUI. If there is a Limit Line Name header, the Limit Line Name will be used instead. Arbitrary text The header block begins with the single line [HEADER], followed by some or all of the following fields, each with <parameter name>=<parameter value>.
Page 954: Select Limit
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save maxtracevalue –5 –5 –29.5 –29.5 –33 –33 note that we are stair-stepping the line –35.6 –35.6 The gap between 216 MHz and 230 MHz will never fail –43.5 5000 –43.5 7.3.6.1 Select Limit Selects the specific Limit to be saved, for example, Limit 1. Preset Not part of Preset, but reset to LLINE1...
Page 955 7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save Dependencies Corrections are not supported by all measurements. If in a Mode in which some measurements support it, this key is grayed-out in measurements that do not. Does not appear at all if no measurements in the Mode support it Does not appear unless you have the proper option installed in your instrument Annotation After save is complete, an advisory is displayed in the message bar confirming which file was saved...
Page 956 7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save Line # Type of field Example Notes on transducer correction data, refer to the Input/Output, Corrections key description. Allowable values: dBuV/m, dBuA/m, dBG, dBpT, None Freq Frequency Interpolation, if omitted leaves the Freq Interpolation Linear Interpolation unchanged. Allowable values: Linear, Logarithmic Bias value in mA Bias,0.00...
Page 957 7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save Similarly, the Bias rows can only be used in Correction register 1, because there can only be one setting for Bias at any given time. If a Correction file with a Bias or Bias State row is loaded into any Correction register but 1, an error is generated: Mass storage error;...
Page 958: Select Correction
The saved file content does not include the label of each recorded entry, just the SCPI mnemonics. The file is saved to the following folder: <user_name>:\Documents\Keysight\Infrastructure\ScpiRecording folder Saving a SCPI Recording as a Python Script To execute the generated Python script: –...
Page 959 7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save import re # connected instrument _inst = '' # SCPI Recording commands and queries # Add/Modify the instrument address to execute the script _connectionString = 'your instrument connection string here' #Example SCPI Recording Entries _recordingEntries = ['Active Mode & Measurement'|':INST:CONF:SA:SANalyzer', 'Query Operation Complete'|'*OPC?', 'Active Mode &...
Page 960: Mask
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save opcIndex = mnemonic.find('OPC?') #if OPC query send the query and get OPC query value if opcIndex >= 0: opcQueryValue = _inst.query(mnemonic) print(opcQueryValue) else: print(mnemonic) _inst.write(mnemonic) err = CheckError() # publish any errors from the previous command if err: print('Error for command ' + label + ': ' + err) for entry in _recordingEntries...
Page 961 7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save of the captured image is displayed, with the note “This is the image that will be saved” below it. After you have completed the save, a message “File image.png saved” (assuming image.png was the filename you used). As of firmware release A.17.50, sending *CLS (Clear Status) removes any...
Page 962: Theme
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save This command works only when the measurement is in Single mode (see "Sweep/Measure" on page 404). When the command is sent, it blocks the SCPI client, waits for the current refresh to complete, then captures the screen shot and saves it.
Page 963: Power Sensor Cal Factor
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save – The FILLed theme is an exact representation of the information on the display – The OUTLine theme eliminates most of the filled areas, in order to save ink when the image is printed. In addition, the yellow trace color is changed to be more orange, to improve visibility against a white background.
Page 964: Mass Storage Catalog (Remote Command Only)
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save 7.3.13.1 Mass Storage Catalog (Remote Command Only) :MMEMory:CATalog? [<directory_name>] Remote Command The string <directory_name> must be a valid logical path. If no string then it uses the current directory :MMEM:CAT? "C:\" Example Notes Queries disk usage information (drive capacity, free space available) and obtains a list of files and directories in a specified directory in the following format: <numeric_value>,<numeric_value>,\{<file_entry>\} It returns two numeric parameters and as many strings as there are files and directories...
Page 965: Mass Storage Device Copy (Remote Command Only)
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save parameter specifies the source, and the second parameter specifies the destination The second form has four parameters. In this form, the first and third parameters specify the source. The second and fourth parameters specify the directories. The first pair of parameters specifies the source.
Page 966: Mass Storage Make Directory (Remote Command Only)
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save The command form :MMEMory:DATA <file_name>,<data> loads <data> into the file <file_name>. <data> is in 488.2 block format. <file_name> is string data The response to :MMEMory:DATA? <file_name> is the associated <data> in block format 7.3.13.7 Mass Storage Make Directory (Remote Command Only) :MMEMory:MDIRectory <directory_name>...
Page 967: Mass Storage Determine Removable Media
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save 7.3.13.10 Mass Storage Determine Removable Media (Remote Query Only) Used to determine whether any removable media devices are connected to the instrument. Primarily, these are USB memory devices plugged-in to the front panel or rear panel USB ports. On instruments with PC6 or PC7 CPUs, one SD card slot is available for removable media.
Page 968: Mass Storage Determine Removable Media Size
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.3 Save :MMEM:RMED:WPR? "F:" Example Notes The return value is 1 if the device is write-protected, and 0 if the device is write-enabled If the <partition> specified does not exist or is not a removable media device the error -252, ”Missing Media”...
Page 969: Print
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.4 Print 7.4 Print Opens a dialog for configuring printing (to the printer of your choice). :HCOPy command is equivalent to pressing the PRINT key. :HCOPy[:IMMediate] Remote Command :HCOPy:ABORt can be used to abort a print that is already in progress. Sending :HCOPy:ABORt causes the instrument to stop sending data to the printer, although the printer may continue or even complete the print, depending on how much data...
Page 970: Page Setup
7 Save/Recall/Print 7.5 Page Setup 7.5 Page Setup Opens a Windows Page Setup dialog that allows you to control aspects of the pages sent to the printer when the PRINT hardkey is pressed. Depending on the abilities of the attached printer, paper size, paper source, page orientation and margins may all be set.
Page 971 7 Save/Recall/Print 7.5 Page Setup :SYSTem:PRINt:THEMe FILLed | OUTLine Remote Command :SYSTem:PRINt:THEMe? :SYST:PRIN:THEM OUTL Example Preset OUTL; not part of Preset, but reset by Restore Misc Defaults or Restore System Defaults All and survives subsequent running of the modes State Saved :SYSTem:PRINt:THEMe TDColor | TDMonochrome | FCOLor | FMONochrome Backwards Compatibility...
Page 972: Trigger
X-Series Signal Analyzers IQ Analyzer Mode User's & Programmer's Reference 8 Trigger Controls the Trigger system of the instrument. In general, these are functions associated with internal triggers or trigger inputs. Trigger Output functions are configured under Input/Output. Trigger functions are common across multiple Modes and Measurements, although some controls appear only in certain Modes and/or certain Measurements.
Page 973: Trigger
8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger 8.1 Trigger Contains controls that let you select the trigger source, and setup of each of the trigger sources. The instrument is designed to allow triggering from many sources, for example, Free Run, Video, External, RF Burst, etc. In general, each Measurement can have a different Trigger Source, and each Measurement remembers its previous-Trigger Source.
Page 974 8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger message will appear that says, “Waiting for trigger”. The trigger annotation in the Meas Bar will also turn amber, as shown below: Tap anywhere on the screen (except on the message itself) to clear the popup. The annotation will remain amber until the trigger conditions are satisfied.
Page 975 8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger except ACP In WLAN, all measurements In Phase Noise, all measurements except Log Plot and Spot Frequency "ADC Trigger" on page All Modes and measurements supporting Video or Level, except Spectrum Analyzer mode Only supported in certain model’s IF Paths LINE "Line"...
Page 976 8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger I/Q Triggers IQMag "I/Q Mag" on page 994 All Modes except EMI, Avionics, RTSA, Analog Demod and Pulse In Spectrum Analyzer, only in Power Stat CCDF and Burst Power IINPut "Input I" on page 994 In WCDMA, only in Power Stat CCDF and IQ Waveform In GSM/EDGE, only in EVM, GMSK Phase &...
Page 977 8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger LTEATDD Power Stat CCDF, and IQ Waveform measurements only Power Amplifier measurement PNOISE IQ Waveform measurement only PULSEX Pulse measurement only Power Stat CCDF and Burst Power measurements only SRCOMMS Modulation Analysis, Power Stat CCDF, and IQ Waveform measurements only Digital Demod, Custom OFDM, IQ Waveform, and Power Stat CCDF measurements only WCDMA QPSK EVM, Power Stat CCDF, and IQ Waveform measurements only...
Page 978 8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger selected trigger conditions are met, generally when your trigger source signal meets the specified trigger level and polarity requirements. (In FFT measurements, the trigger controls when the data acquisition begins for FFT conversion.) For each of the trigger sources, you may define a set of operational parameters or settings, which will be applied when that source is selected as the current trigger source.
Page 979 8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger Remote Command Swept SA and RTSA measurements: :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce EXTernal1 | EXTernal2 | EXTernal3 | IMMediate | LINE | FRAMe | RFBurst | VIDeo | TV | PXI | INTernal :TRIGger[:SEQuence]:SOURce? All other measurements :TRIGger:<measurement>[:SEQuence]:SOURce EXTernal1 | EXTernal2 | EXTernal3 | AEXTernal | IMMediate | LEVel | FMT | LINE | ADC | FRAMe | RFBurst | VIDeo | IQMag | IDEMod | QDEMod | IINPut | QINPut | AIQMag | PXI | INTernal | PRTChandet | PRTFrame | PRTEvent...
Page 980 8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger Notes For some of the trigger parameters, the tie-in to the parameter is not obvious. These are: IMMediate, selects Free Run FRAMe , selects Periodic Trigger FMT, selects Frequency Mask Trigger AEXTernal, selects Audio External trigger, using the TRIG IN connector on the M9260A Audio Analyzer module For most measurements, the <measurement>...
Page 981 8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger For Power Stat CCDF and IQ Waveform in 5G NR and LTEATDD, switching the radio direction changes this parameter to the preset value In Transmit On|Off Power in 5G NR and LTEATDD, the value changes as follows –...
Page 982 8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger Meas Mode Preset for RF Preset for IQ – BTS: External 1 - MS: FRAM Others: – MS: Periodic Timer Others: SA, WCDMA, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, IQ not MSR,SRCOMMS, 5GNR supported SA, GSM RFBurst Tx Power SA, WCDMA, MSR, LTEAFDD, LTEATDD, SPUR IQ not 5GNR, WLAN...
Page 983 8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger Meas Mode Preset for RF Preset for IQ EDGE/GSM EDGE EVM EDGE ORFS EDGE/GSM Periodic Timer IQ not supported Combined WCDMA IQ not WCDMA supported Combined EDGE/GSM IQ not supported WCDMA, EDGE/GSM List Power Step IQ not supported Transmit LTETDD, LTEATDD, 5GNR...
Page 984 8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger this is not the case; for backwards compatibility, no <measurement> parameter is used when setting the Trigger Source for the Swept SA measurement. :TRIGger:<measurement>[:SEQuence]:RF:SOURce EXTernal1 | EXTernal2 | Remote Command IMMediate | LEVel | FMT | LINE | FRAMe | RFBurst | VIDeo | IF | TV | PXI | INTernal | PRTChandet | PRTFrame | PRTEvent :TRIGger:<measurement>[:SEQuence]:RF:SOURce? Note that the available parameters are model number and hardware dependent...
Page 985 8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger PRTFrame triggers on the Base Station Emulation periodic technology format radio frame with data frame aligned to the BSE timing PRTEvent triggers on the Base Station Emulation events INTernal triggers on the internal source trigger output, for models with an internal source such as VXT trigger only supported in PXI (modular) instruments...
Page 986: Free Run
8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger Notes Not all measurements have all the trigger sources available to them. Check the trigger source documentation for your specific measurement to see what sources are available Note that not all trigger sources are available for each input, and that the available parameters are model number and hardware dependent For the I/Q Trigger Source, the following trigger sources are available: IMMediate...
Page 987: Adc Trigger
8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger The Video trigger level is shown as a labeled line on the display. The line is displayed as long as Video is the selected trigger source. The Trigger Level line can be adjusted using the step keys, knob, or numeric keypad. It can also be dragged on the display with your finger or with a mouse.
Page 988: Line
8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger If ADC trigger is available for at least one IF Path on a model, then the ADC trigger will always be seen as a trigger option in IQ Measurements. However, it will only be available (not grayed out) to select when using IF Paths that support it. If Video Trigger is selected and measurement setup (IF Path or IF BW) is changed to a path that only supports the ADC trigger instead, then ADC trigger will be selected and vice versa.
Page 989 8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger The Trigger tab contains the following Trigger Source dependent controls when External 1 Trigger is selected: – "Prot Frame Aligned" on page 998 – "Trigger Delay" on page 1001 – "Trigger Slope" on page 1005 Additional controls are also present that are not dependent on the selected Trigger Source.
Page 990 8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger 8.1.1.7 External 3 When External 3 is selected, a new sweep/measurement starts when the external trigger condition is met using the TRIGGER 3 IN input connector on the rear panel. This control only appears in certain instrument and option combinations, as follows. –...
Page 991: Audio External
8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger 8.1.1.8 Audio External When Audio External is selected, a new sweep/measurement starts when the external trigger condition is met using the TRIG IN input connector on the front panel of the M9260A Audio Analyzer module. This is a TTL level input (not analog) that supports both rising edge and falling edge triggers.
Page 992: Periodic
8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger Additional controls are also present that are not dependent on the selected Trigger Source. :TRIG:SOUR RFB Example Swept SA measurement :TRIG:<meas>:SOUR RFB Measurements other than Swept SA Annunciation RF Burst (in the Meas Bar) 8.1.1.10 Periodic When Periodic is selected, the instrument uses a built-in periodic timer signal as the trigger.
Page 993 8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger More Information The graphic below shows the action of the periodic timer trigger. A common application is measuring periodic burst RF signals for which a trigger signal is not easily available. For example, we might be measuring a TDMA radio that bursts every 20 ms.
Page 994: I/Q Mag
8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger shown. The instrument trigger occurs at a time delayed by the accumulated offset from the period trigger event. The periodic timer continues to run, and triggers continue to occur, with a periodicity determined by the instrument time base. The timer output (labeled "late event") will drift away from its ideal time due to imperfect matching between the time base of the signal being measured and the time base of the instrument, and also because of imperfect setting of the period parameter.
Page 995: Input Q
8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger Additional controls are also present that are not dependent on the selected Trigger Source. :TRIG:<meas>:SOUR IINP Example Annunciation Input I (in the Meas Bar) 8.1.1.13 Input Q When Input Q is selected, the condition is met when the voltage at the I Input crosses the trigger level.
Page 996: Q (Demodulated)
8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger 8.1.1.15 Q (Demodulated) When Q (Demodulated) is selected, the trigger condition is met when the Q voltage crosses the Q voltage trigger level. This trigger type is only valid for measurements that support the I/Q inputs. The Trigger tab contains the following Trigger Source dependent controls when Q (Demodulated) Trigger is selected: –...
Page 997: Pxi
8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger 8.1.1.17 PXI When PXI is selected, a new sweep/measurement will start when detecting the signal from the PXI backplane trigger line. This trigger type is only found in the modular instrument products. The Trigger tab contains the following Trigger Source dependent controls when PXI Trigger is selected: –...
Page 998: Prot Channel Detection
8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger output trigger should not be off if internal source works as list sequence mode and Trig 2 Out should not be off if internal source works as MXG mode. Otherwise, no trigger occurs, and measurement does not start. Example Swept SA measurement: :TRIG:SOUR INTernal...
Page 999: Prot Event
8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger 8.1.1.21 Prot Event Selects a protocol frame aligned Base Station Emulation as the trigger. When Prot Frame Aligned is selected, a new sweep/measurement will start when the protocol frame aligned data trigger condition is met. Prot Event Trigger is defined as the Base Station Emulation protocol internal event such as the starting of a predefined uplink pattern for a relative power control ramp.
Page 1000 8 Trigger 8.1 Trigger Trigger Level Parameters Source Example Prese Resoluti Step Knob Key Incr Incr TRIG:VID:L Video -170 dBm +30 dBm .01 dB Scale/D Step/10, EV -40 dBm iv (Log), 1 dB never < (Lin) 0.1 dB TRIG:LEV:L Level -170 dBm +30 dBm .01 dB Scale/D Step/10,...

This manual is also suitable for:

E6680e E6681a M9410a M9411a M9415a M9416a ... Show all